User Guide

Streaming AV Product

SMP 300 Series

Streaming Media Processor

68-2238-01 Rev. P
08 22
Safety Instructions
Copyright
© 2016-2022 Extron. All rights reserved. www.extron.com

Trademarks
All trademarks mentioned in this guide are the properties of their respective owners.
The following registered trademarks (®), registered service marks (SM), and trademarks (TM) are the property of RGB Systems, Inc. or Extron (see the
current list of trademarks on the Terms of Use page at www.extron.com):

Registered Trademarks (®)

Extron, Cable Cubby, ControlScript, CrossPoint, DTP, eBUS, EDID Manager, EDID Minder, eLink, Flat Field, FlexOS, Glitch Free, Global Configurator,
Global Scripter, GlobalViewer, Hideaway, HyperLane, IP Intercom, IP Link, Key Minder, LinkLicense, LockIt, MediaLink, MediaPort, NAV,
NetPA, PlenumVault, PoleVault, PowerCage, PURE3, Quantum, ShareLink, Show Me, SoundField, SpeedMount, SpeedSwitch, StudioStation,
System INTEGRATOR, TeamWork, TouchLink, V‑Lock, VN‑Matrix, VoiceLift, WallVault, WindoWall, XPA, XTP, XTP Systems, and ZipClip
Registered Service Mark(SM) : S3 Service Support Solutions
Trademarks (™)
AAP, AFL (Accu‑RATE Frame Lock), ADSP (Advanced Digital Sync Processing), AVEdge, CableCover, CDRS (Class D Ripple Suppression),
Codec Connect, DDSP (Digital Display Sync Processing), DMI (Dynamic Motion Interpolation), Driver Configurator, DSP Configurator,
DSVP (Digital Sync Validation Processing), EQIP, Everlast, FastBite, Flex55, FOX, FOXBOX, IP Intercom HelpDesk, MAAP, MicroDigital,
Opti‑Torque, PendantConnect, ProDSP, QS‑FPC (QuickSwitch Front Panel Controller), Room Agent, Scope‑Trigger, SIS, Simple Instruction Set,
Skew‑Free, SpeedNav, Triple‑Action Switching, True4K, True8K, Vector™ 4K, WebShare, XTRA, and ZipCaddy
FCC Class A Notice
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. The Class A limits provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause interference. This interference must be corrected at the expense of the user.

NOTE: For more information on safety guidelines, regulatory compliances, EMI/EMF

compatibility, accessibility, and related topics, see the Extron Safety and Regulatory
Compliance Guide on the Extron website.

Battery Notice
This product contains a battery. Do not open the unit to replace the battery. If the
battery needs replacing, return the entire unit to Extron (for the correct address, see the
Extron Warranty section on the last page of this guide).

CAUTION: Risk of explosion. Do not replace the battery with an incorrect type.
Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
ATTENTION : Risque d’explosion. Ne pas remplacer la pile par le mauvais type de
pile. Débarrassez-vous des piles usagées selon le mode d’emploi.

VCCI-A Notice
この装置は、
クラスＡ情報技術装置です。この装置を家庭環境で使用すると、電波妨害を引き
起こすことがあります。その場合には使用者が適切な対策を講ずるよう要求されることがあります。
ＶＣＣI －Ａ
Conventions Used in this Guide

Notifications
The following notifications are used in this guide:

ATTENTION:
• Risk of property damage.
• Risque de dommages matériels.

NOTE: A note draws attention to important information.

TIP: A tip provides a suggestion to make working with the application easier.

Software Commands
Commands are written in the fonts shown here:
^AR Merge Scene,,0p1 scene 1,1 ^B 51 ^W^C.0
[01] R 0004 00300 00400 00800 00600 [02] 35 [17] [03]
E X! *X1&* X2)* X2#* X2! CE}
NOTE: For commands and examples of computer or device responses used in this
guide, the character “0” is used for the number zero and “O” is the capital letter
“o.”
Computer responses and directory paths that do not have variables are written in the font
shown here:
Reply from 208.132.180.48: bytes=32 times=2ms TTL=32
C:\Program Files\Extron
Variables are written in slanted form as shown here:
ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx —t
SOH R Data STX Command ETB ETX
Selectable items, such as menu names, menu options, buttons, tabs, and field names are
written in the font shown here:
From the File menu, select New.
Click the OK button.

Specifications Availability
Product specifications are available on the Extron website, www.extron.com.

Extron Glossary of Terms

A glossary of terms is available at http://www.extron.com/technology/glossary.aspx.
Contents

Introduction................................................ 1 Background Recall Menu

About this Guide................................................... 1 (For composite mode only)............................ 43
About the SMP 300 Series................................... 1 Advanced Configuration Menu........................ 43
PC Requirements................................................. 3 Comm Settings (View and Edit) Menu............. 46
Extron LinkLicense............................................... 3 Status Menu................................................... 48
Licensed Third-party Software.............................. 4 Exit Menu....................................................... 48
General Product Overview.................................... 6 Front Panel Lockout (Executive Modes).............. 49
Input................................................................. 6 Alarms................................................................ 49
Encoding and Output....................................... 6
File Storage...................................................... 7 Web-Based User Interface........................ 52
Control Options................................................ 8 Overview of the Web-Based User Interface......... 52
Recordings....................................................... 8 Web Browser Requirements........................... 53
Features............................................................. 10 Web-Based User Interface Help Files.............. 53
Accessing the Web-Based User Interface........... 53
Installation................................................ 15 Page Overview............................................... 55
Mounting the SMP 300 Series............................ 15 Logging Out and Logging In............................... 57
Rear Panel Overview.......................................... 15 AV Controls Panel............................................... 58
Power Connection.......................................... 16 AV Controls Panel Features............................ 58
Control System and External Start an Ad Hoc Recording............................ 61
Device Connections....................................... 16 Recording Controls............................................. 64
Input Connections.......................................... 17 Scheduled Events............................................... 66
Output Connections....................................... 17 Recording Calendar........................................ 66
Rear Panel Reset................................................ 19 Schedule Settings........................................... 67
Publish Settings.............................................. 69
Configuration...................................................... 72
Front Panel Operation............................. 21 Configuration Tab Features............................. 73
Front Panel Features........................................... 21 Input/Output Settings..................................... 74
Layout Presets (For Composite Mode Only)........ 23 Image Settings............................................... 79
Power Up Procedure.......................................... 25 Encoding & Layout......................................... 81
Front Panel Menu Operation............................... 26 Users and Roles............................................. 86
Menu Navigation............................................. 26 Alarms and Traps............................................ 88
Menu Overview............................................... 26 System Settings............................................. 89
Presets Menu................................................. 28 Advanced Features......................................... 93
Picture Control Menu...................................... 30 File Management................................................ 95
Record and Stream Configuration Menu......... 33 Add a Network Share..................................... 96
Input Configuration Menu............................... 39 Upload and Download Files Using
an SFTP Client............................................... 96

SMP 300 Series • Contents vii

 Troubleshooting.................................................. 97 DataViewer....................................................... 141
Features of the Troubleshooting Page............. 97 What is an IP Address?................................ 142
Status............................................................. 98 Private and Public Address Ranges.............. 143
Logs............................................................... 99 Multicast Address Range.............................. 143
Alarms.......................................................... 100 Subnet Mask................................................ 143
Diagnostic Tools........................................... 101 Port Number................................................. 144
System Resets............................................. 102 Choosing an IP Address............................... 144
Mirroring LinkLicense........................................ 103 Using the Ping Utility to Test
Communications......................................... 145
FlexOS Applications................................ 104 Multicast IP Addressing for Multiple
SMP 300 Series Installations........................ 146
Optional Applications........................................ 104
Streaming Method Overview............................ 146
Digital I/O Configurator................................. 104
Protocols Used for Streaming....................... 146
Kaltura.......................................................... 105
Streaming Playback Methods....................... 149
iCalendar...................................................... 105
Streaming Capabilities and
Panopto....................................................... 105 System Scalability........................................ 151
Playing a Pull Stream Using
Remote Communication and Control...... 106 VLC Media Player........................................ 153
Connection Options.......................................... 106 Playing a Push Stream Using Stream
RS-232 Port................................................. 106 Announcement Protocol (SAP)..................... 155
Front Panel Configuration Port...................... 106 Playing a Pull Stream Using
Ethernet (LAN) Port....................................... 107 QuickTime Media Player.............................. 157
Host-to-device Communications...................... 108 Estimating Storage Requirements
for a Recording................................................ 159
SMP 300 Series-initiated Messages.............. 108
Estimating Storage per Recording Hour........ 159
Password Information................................... 109
Front Panel Menu Diagrams............................. 160
Error Responses........................................... 109
Front Panel Menu Diagrams
Using the Command and Response Tables...... 109
(Record/Stream Configuration)........................ 161
Command and Response Tables...................... 114

Glossary.................................................. 162
Reference Information............................ 138
Mounting the SMP 300 Series.......................... 138
Extron Warranty...................................... 170
Tabletop Use................................................ 138
Furniture Mounting....................................... 138
Table or Wall Mounting.................................. 138
Rack Mounting............................................. 138
Supported File Types, Drive Formats,
Browsers, and Browser Plugins....................... 140
File Formats.................................................. 140
Drive Formats............................................... 140
Browsers...................................................... 140
Browser Plugins............................................ 140

SMP 300 Series • Contents viii

Introduction

This section gives an overview of the user guide and describes the SMP 300 Series and its
features. Topics that are covered include:
• About this Guide
• About the SMP 300 Series
• PC Requirements
• Licensed Third-party Software
• Extron LinkLicense
• General Product Overview
• Features

About this Guide

This guide contains installation, configuration, and operating information for the SMP 351,
SMP 351 3G-SDI, SMP 352, and SMP 352 3G-SDI. In this guide:
• “SMP 300 Series”, “SMP models”, or “the SMP” refer to the SMP 351,
SMP 351 3G-SDI, SMP 352, SMP 352 3G-SDI models.
• “Codec” refers to the H.264 / MPEG-4 AVC codec.
• “Stream” can refer to audio, video, or both that is transmitted by the SMP.
• “UI” and “web UI” refer to the web-based User Interface.

About the SMP 300 Series

The Extron SMP 300 Series is a compact, high performance H.264 recording and streaming
processor that provides the ability to record a presentation and output an HDMI signal to a
local display, and, if needed, stream the AV content live while recording.
Six versions of the SMP models, with varying internal file storage capacity, are available:
• SMP 351 (150 GB and 480 GB)
• SMP 351 3G-SDI (150 GB and 480 GB)
• SMP 352 (480 GB)
• SMP 352 3G-SDI (480 GB)
NOTE: The SMP models have similar front and rear panel features and function exactly
the same. The SMP 351 3G-SDI and SMP 352 3G-SDI support a 3G-SDI video input.
Figure 1 on page 2 shows an SMP 351 application that utilizes Channel A HDMI and an
audio loop-out for local display of the computer input. The presentation is then streamed to
an SMD 101.
Figure 2 on page 2 shows a typical SMP 352 application featuring a computer input
with embedded audio, an SDI camera input, and a wireless microphone for audio. The
presentation is streamed to a SMD 101 and the SMP 352 records both channels and
publishes to the Kaltura cloud hosted service. The SMP 351 models can be upgraded to
support SMP 352 features through a LinkLicense upgrade.

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 1

 Figure 1. Typical SMP 351 Application
MODEL 80 MODEL 80

FLAT PANEL FLAT PANEL

HDMI HDMI
SMD 101 SMD 101
POWER POWER
OUTPUTS

OUTPUTS

12V AUDIO 12V AUDIO

1.0A MAX L R IR IN RS-232 RESET 1.0A MAX L R IR IN RS-232 RESET

HDMI S G Tx Rx G
LAN HDMI S G Tx Rx G
LAN

Extron Extron
SMD 101 SMD 101
Streaming Media Streaming Media Decoder
Decoder

Wireless
Microphone
System
POWER STANDBY

PTZ Camera HD-SDI

WiFi 1 2 3 4

Ethernet

HDMI Audio

PC 1920x1080p
100-240V --A MAX
3 5 OUTPUTS SMP 300 SERIES
AUDIO
HDMI HDMI B-Y
INPUTS-CH B
INPUTS-CH A

MOUSE / LOOPOUT
KEYBOARD 1
L R 3G/HD/SDI LAN
1 DIGITAL I/O REMOTE 4
USB STORAGE RS-232 L R L AUDIO R L AUDIO R RESET
2
2 R-Y VID
1 2 3 4 G Tx Rx G /Y HDMI HDMI
50-60 Hz

Ethernet
Extron LAN
SMP 352
Streaming Media Processor Stage 1

Planning
Stage 2

Preparation
Stage 3

Training
Stage 4

Evaluation

Needs Analysis

Proposal & Estimate

Course Schedule
Student Selection

Instructor Selection

Text Selection
Instructor Observation

Evaluation

Questionnaire

Student Feedback
Student

Presentations

Student Evaluations

Course Review
Ethernet

Figure 2. Typical SMP 352 Application

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 2

PC Requirements
The PC requirements to access the default web pages of the SMP are listed below.
• Hardware
• 2.0 GHz dual-core processor
• Operating Systems
• Microsoft® Windows® XP or higher
• Mac® OS® X® 10.6 or higher
• Web Browsers
NOTE: The preview video in the AV Controls panel of the SMP uses an HTML5
player and is not supported by Microsoft Edge™ or Apple® Safari®. To see a
preview of the current stream either:
• Use a different browser or
• Open a standalone, third-party video player (such as VideoLAN opensource
VLC media player) and connect to the stream from the SMP.
• Google® Chrome™ version 48 or higher
• Mozilla® Firefox® version 44 or higher
• Microsoft Edge™
• Apple® Safari® version 9 or higher (for macOS® operating systems)
NOTE: Safari is the preferred browser for macOS operating systems.
• Additionally, the device web UI is compliant, but not fully featured, with the internal
browser client: QTWeb v4.x

Extron LinkLicense
An Extron LinkLicense unlocks features that add convenience, expand system options, and
enhance the capabilities of Extron products. Each LinkLicense can be purchased separately
from the SMP and activated as the need arises.
LinkLicense upgrades available for the SMP 300 Series include the following:
• Dual Recording Upgrade — This LinkLicense upgrades an SMP 351 or SMP 351
3G-SDI into the corresponding SMP 352 model.
• This license is enabled once and lasts for the life of the product.
• Enables the SMP 351 to create independent recordings and two streams from two
different video sources. The upgrade provides independent archive and confidence
stream settings for each channel. Users have the choice of creating a single layout
for simultaneous streaming and recording (composite recording mode) or enabling
the dual recording feature to create synchronized recordings and streams with the
two video channels (dual channel mode).
• Unlocks advanced audio DSP capabilities for channel B dual mono inputs, bass
and treble controls, filtering, and dynamics.
• Enables streaming presets that increase functionality and provide a simplified
workflow.
• Enhanced Kaltura Features Upgrade —
• An annually-renewable support license.
• Enables the ability to schedule recordings directly from Kaltura.
• Enables the unit to stream live media to Kaltura using RTMP.

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 3

 • Horizontal Video Mirroring Upgrade —
• Enables the feature that flips the video horizontally before the encoding, allowing a
presenter to stand behind a glass marker board and face the camera, while writing
on the board. The image is flipped to allow the writing to be displayed correctly.
• Enables the user to adjust the minimum available recording time.
• Enables the user to set a delay to start recording after the record command is
issued.
• Enhanced Panopto Features Upgrade —
• An annually-renewable support license.
• Enables the ability to schedule recordings directly from Panopto.
• Enables the unit to stream live media to Panopto using RTMP or RTMPS.
For more information on each LinkLicense, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages
Help File.

Licensed Third-party Software

The following table lists the licensed third-party software used by the SMP models.
NOTE: Licensed third-party software used by the SMP models is subject to change
without notice.

Licensed Third-party Software Used in the SMP 300 Series

Package License Package License
ExtJS 4 Sencha Commercial License logrotate GPLv2
alsa-lib LGPLv2.1 lshw GPLv2
alsa-utils GPLv2 lsof lsof license
aufs2-util GPLv2 ltrace GPLv2
aws-sdk-cpp GPLv2 lua MIT
busybox GPLv2 luabitop MIT
bzip2 bzip2 license lua-cjson MIT
cjson MIT luacrypto MIT
cracklib LGPLv2.1 luaexpat MIT
dbus AFLv2.1 or GPLv2 luaposix MIT
dosfstools GPLv2 luasocket MIT
e2fsprogs GPLv2, libuuid BSD-3c, libss and luastruct MIT
libet MIT-like with advertising clause
ethtool GPLv2 lvm2 GPLv2 LGPLv2.1
eudev GPLv2 lzo GPLv2
eventlog BSD-3c mtd GPLv2
expat MIT mxml LGPLv2 with exceptions
fbset GPLv2 ncurses MIT with advertising clause
file BSD-2c, one file BSD-4c, one file neon LGPLv2 (library), GPLv2 (manual and
BSD-3c tests)
flex FLEX netcat GPLv2
fontconfig fontconfig license netsnmp Various BSD-like

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 4

 Licensed Third-party Software Used in the SMP 300 Series
Package License Package License
freetype Dual FTL/GPLv2 nfs-utils GPLv2
gnupg GPLv2 nginx BSD-2c
heirloom-mailx BSD-4c, Bellcore (base64), nmap GPLv2
OpenVision (imap_gssapi), RSA Data
Security (md5), Network Working
Group (hmac), MPLv1.1 (nss)
i2c-tools GPLv2, GPLv2 (py-smbus) ntp ntp license
ifplugd GPLv2 openssh BSD-3c, BSD-2c, Public Domain
iostat GPL openssl OpenSSL or SSLeay
iproute2 GPLv2 pcre BSD-3c
iptables GPLv2 popt MIT
jpeg-turbo jpeg-license (BSD-3c-like) procps GPLv2, libproc and libps LGPLv2
kmod LGPLv2.1 psmisc GPLv2
libassuan LGPLv2.1 (Library only) pv Artistic-2.0
libcgicc LGPLv2.1 qjson LGPLv2.1
libcurl ISC qt LGPLv2.1 with exceptions
libdaemon LGPLv2.1 qwt Unknown
libdnet BSD-3c rapidjson MIT
libelf LGPLv2 rpcbind BSD-3c
libevent BSD-3c, OpenBSD smartmontools GPLv2
libfcgi fcgi license socat GPLv2
libffi MIT spawn-fcgi BSD-3c
libglib2 LGPLv2 sqlite Public domain
libgpg-error LGPLv2.1 strace BSD-3c
libgpgme LGPLv2.1 syslog-ng LGPLv2.1 (syslog-ng core), GPLv2
(modules)
libpcap BSD-3c sysstat GPLv2
libpng libpng license tcpdump BSD-3c
libssh2 BSD tzdata Public domain
libtirpc BSD-3c usbutils GPLv2
libusb LGPLv2.1 util-linux GPLv2, BSD-4c, libblkid and libmount
LGPLv2.1, libuuid BSD-3c
libv4l Unknown vsftpd GPLv2
libxml2 MIT xinetd xinetd license
Linux-PAM BSD-3c zlib zlib license
lm-sensors libsensors LGPLv2.1, programs
GPLv2

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 5

General Product Overview

Input
The SMP 300 Series can accept up to three HDMI inputs and one component or
composite video input. The SMP 351 3G-SDI and SMP 352 3G-SDI are identical to the
SMP 351 and SMP 352 with the addition of the 3G/HD/SDI input (input 5). All models
accept digital audio embedded on HDMI signals or analog audio input via captive screw
connectors.
• Input 1 (HDMI) and input 2 (HDMI) are grouped as channel A.
• Input 3 (component or composite video), input 4 (HDMI), and optional input 5
(3G/HD/SDI) are grouped as channel B.
• One video and one audio input can be selected and active per input channel.
With firmware v3.04 or higher, two additional virtual inputs are available, allowing the SMP to
record up to four inputs. A virtual input must be selected before recording starts and cannot
be changed until the recording is completed (see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web
Pages Help File to configure the virtual inputs).
NOTES:
• The SMP accepts up to two RTSP or Push ES/RTP multicast streams. It records
the two virtual inputs at its native resolution into m4v/mp4 files, and allows
re‑streaming. In Dual channel mode, the SMP can record up to 4 files plus an
audio-only file.
• The SMP does not decode and composite virtual inputs into a layout.
• For this initial release of the virtual inputs, the SMP cannot connect to a virtual input
stream that requires password authentication.
• Once the virtual input is turned on, the SMP connects with the incoming streams.
The virtual input status can be monitored from the web UI.
• Some RTSP IP camera streams do not include RTCP packets and its packet
received or dropped status is always shown as zero on web UI.

Encoding and Output

The SMP models support multiple simultaneous stream encoders. Additionally, the
SMP 352 supports channel A and channel B archive streaming. Each can have a different
resolution, frame rate, bit rate, and independent streaming protocol methods. The output
defaults to both record and stream the selected input.
• Archive (channel A and channel B in dual channel mode) — Highest quality for both
recording and streaming.
• Channel A default: Pull, unicast RTP/UDP
• Channel B default: Not enabled
• Confidence — For streaming only (default: Pull, unicast RTP/UDP).
In composite mode, signals from the two input channels, a background image, and
metadata (descriptive information about data content) are combined in a user-configurable
layout and encoded into streams. The SMP 300 Series has two encoding types (see
Encoding & Layout on page 81). The SMP can encode on archive encoding mode for
high quality streams (for recording and optional live streaming), and on Confidence encoding
mode for lower resolution streams (for preview within its embedded web pages and optional
live streaming). The video output can be scaled and its aspect ratio modified. The SMP 300
Series also outputs high quality encoded HDMI video with embedded audio on a single
output for display on any HDMI display, supporting resolutions up to 1920x1080 at 60 Hz.
NOTE: Signal flow for both channel A and channel B can be followed from input to
output in the block diagram in figure 3 on page 7.

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 6

 SMP 300 Series

Inputs Outputs
Channel
Frame rate HDMI/DVI
A rear panel
1: HDMI/DVI conversion local output
2: HDMI/DVI
HDMI Loop-
through Recording
(unprocessed) files
External
Channel Deinter- and USB drive
B lacing, /or (front or
Archive Automatic2
3: Analog scaling, Internal rear port, or upload of
encoding1 RCP 101)
component rasterizing, storage recording
video (YUVp, blending to a
YUVi) or network
composite video drive
4: HDMI/DVI
5: 3G/SDI/HD-SDI
(optional) TCP/IP Streamed
LAN Network archive
Confidence port output
encoding

Background AV Streamed
PNG file Controls confidence
+12 V Control Data / panel output
(internal power signals recording
storage) preview

2
For automatic uploading, set a default
= Recorded file upload (if set up) RECORD destination (such as Panopto, Kaltura
= Optional streamed output system, Opencast system, or an FTP,
SFTP, or CIFS server location) to which to
1 publish recordings (Scheduled Events >
Archive encoding produces:
• one composite stream for SMP 351 models Publish Settings).
• two (dual) streams or one composite stream MARK
for SMP 352 models and for SMP 351 USB STORAGE
models with LinkLicense.

RCP 101
Figure 3. SMP 300 Series Block Diagram
File Storage
Internal storage is available for storing background image files and recordings to be
uploaded to a file server. Some models have 150 GB internal, solid state storage. Other
models have 480 GB internal, solid state storage. View the total storage size for a model in
the storage information table found on the Recording Controls embedded web page (see
Storage Information in the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File) or by checking
the part number (Configuration > System Settings > Unit Identification). From
the front panel of the device, use the STATUS menu (see Status Menu on page 48) and
scroll down to the Drive Space sub‑menu to determine the total drive space and remaining
space.
Two USB ports (one on the front panel, one on the rear panel) provide a connection for
portable, user-provided USB drives for storing recordings. The optional RCP 101 also has a
USB port to connect a user-provided USB drive for storing recordings.
If the unit is connected to a LAN (see Add a Network Share on page 96), background
image files provided by a user can be uploaded to the SMP or imported from a network
attached storage drive. To use background images in composite mode, the files must reside
in internal storage.

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 7

Control Options
The SMP 300 Series can be controlled using the following:
• Front panel menus and controls
• Simple Instruction Set (SIS) commands sent over Ethernet via the LAN connection,
RS‑232 via the rear panel Remote captive screw connector, or USB via the front panel
Config port.
• SMP 300 Series embedded web pages over Ethernet connection.
• USB mouse and keyboard ports provide direct connection of a keyboard and mouse to
permit the use of an internal browser client. This allows limited web page configuration
of the network settings for the device.
• Four digital I/O ports can be configured (using a FlexOS application) as digital inputs
to receive status from other devices like push-button controls and projector lifts.
Alternatively, they can be configured as digital outputs to drive LEDs or devices that
accept a TTL input signal for local device control.
• The optional Extron RCP 101 remote control panel connected through either the
keyboard or mouse port on the rear panel.

Recordings
The core function of the SMP 300 Series is to create recording files from connected audio
and video input sources or virtual inputs.
NOTES:
• Secondary recording must be turned off in order to record virtual input into files.
• The SMP does not create chapter marks or capture thumbnails on virtual input
recordings.

Start a recording
Recordings are initiated in one of several ways:
• Unscheduled (ad hoc) recordings — Require manual configuration. To use this
method, perform one of the following:

• Press the Record ( ) button on the front panel of the SMP 300 Series or
RCP 101 remote control panel.

• Click the Record ( ) button in the AV Controls panel of the SMP 300 Series
embedded web pages (see Start an Ad Hoc Recording on page 61) and set
the options in the Start an Ad hoc Recording window
• Tap a control button on a configured touchpanel (such as an Extron TLP Pro Series
touchpanel with a custom script).
• Scheduled recordings — Recordings start automatically at the date and time
specified in a calendar schedule. Schedules can be imported on a one-time basis, on
a periodic basis (updated on a fixed interval), or an ongoing basis (using a compatible
scheduling server such as Opencast or Microsoft Exchange) (see System Settings on
page 89 for details on how to set up recording schedules).

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 8

Make a recording
The SMP 300 Series creates recordings by:
• Composite mode — Scaling and arranging the content from one or both AV
inputs, channel A and channel B, and the optional background .png file as defined
by the selected layout preset (see Layout presets (for composite mode only) on
page 84).
• Dual mode — Scaling channel A and channel B in full screen with no background and
no metadata.
• Encoding the content into up to three encoding streams (two encoding streams [archive
and confidence] in composite mode, three encoding streams [ChA archive, ChB archive
and confidence] in dual channel mode (see Encoding & Layout on page 81).
• SMP 351 models encode the content and layout into two encoding streams, archive
and confidence.
• SMP 352 models and SMP 351 models, with LinkLicense, encode the content and
layout into three encoder streams that include archive channel A, archive channel B,
and confidence.
• Creating a set of files — One or more .m4v or .mp4 files and other files containing
metadata, thumbnail images, and optional chapter markers. These files are stored either
within the unit (the internal, default location), or on an optional USB drive (see Encoding
& Layout for instructions on how to set the default recording storage location).
The SMP 300 Series creates a set of the same types of files for every recording, regardless
of how a recording is initiated. Default file names are specified within the System Settings
page (see Setting the Default Recording Media on page 90 for details).

Output and share recordings

Recording files can be saved in the SMP 300 Series internal memory and on an optional
connected USB drive. Recordings stored internally (not on a USB drive) can also be
automatically uploaded to a network server folder.
NOTES:
• When integrated with an Opencast or Kaltura, server, both ad hoc and scheduled
recordings are automatically uploaded to the server location defined during the
scheduling setup.
• To upload recordings for other scheduling or integration methods, specify a
publishing destination during system setup (FTP, SFTP, or CIFS/Windows Net
Share server folder).
Uploading recordings to a server allows the user to archive or share files with others who are
authorized to access that folder or to use tools such as Opencast.
• Opencast is an end-to-end software solution that facilitates the capture, management,
and playback of media files from meetings, lectures, and other live events. Current,
previously recorded, or archived media files can be added to Opencast, making
everything accessible from a single point. Opencast ensures recordings with metadata
are packaged for playback within the player environment.

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 9

Features
• Process two high resolution AV sources from up to five available input signals
— Size and position two AV source signals in layouts that maximize the viewing
experience.
• Record and stream simultaneously — Document presentations, view confidence
streaming, or extend live media to overflow destinations without the need for a
computer or additional equipment.
• High quality scaling with flexible two-window management — Display one or two
high resolution sources in various window arrangements, including picture-in-picture
and picture-by-picture arrangements for optimal interpretation.
• Produce MP4 media or M4A audio files that are compatible with virtually any
media player — Use recordings produced by the SMP directly with any software
media player, computer, or mobile device.
• Stream concurrently at two resolutions and bit rates from the same source
— High resolutions and high bit rates deliver superior quality images for overflow
applications, and lower bit rates and resolutions are more efficient for streaming
distribution and confidence viewing applications.
• Dual channel recording and streaming with confidence stream (SMP 352) — The
SMP 352 can simultaneously record and stream from two different video sources with
independent stream settings for each channel. A confidence stream is also available for
remote preview of recorded or streamed content.
• Flexible dual channel layout for confidence output (SMP 352) — Choose between
ten different layouts for confidence stream and local HDMI confidence output to preview
both video channels in different PiP or Side by Side modes.
• LinkLicense for dual channel recording and streaming — The LinkLicense
upgrade enables simultaneous recording and streaming from two different video
sources with independent stream settings for each channel. A confidence stream will
also be available for remote preview of recorded or streamed content.
• Internal Solid State Storage — Save recorded data to reliable, internal storage,
before transferring it to external destinations. Capacity of 128 GB (110 GB for recording
files) or 480 GB (440 GB for recording files). Up to 40 hours of material can be saved to
the 128 GB version, or 150 hours to the optional 480 GB version, encoded at 10 Mbps.
• Audio mixing and advanced DSP functionality — Advanced audio DSP features
offer control over audio levels, filtering, and dynamics for a quality audio experience
without requiring the use of external mixing and DSP equipment.
• RTMP and RTMPS streaming protocols support popular third party hosting
services — Supports RTMP push streaming with stream name or key, and user
authentication for services like YouTube Live, Wowza, Twitch, IBM Cloud, and more.
Supports streaming to Facebook Live using the RTMPS streaming protocol.
• Flexible I/O ports for advanced AV system management — Install Extron FlexOS
applications onto the SMP that interface with control ports and automate system
operation.
• License-free operation contributes to a low cost of ownership — With no
required licensing or recurring support fees, the SMP is a cost-effective solution for AV
recording and streaming.
• Save recordings to internal solid state drive, external USB storage, or a defined
network storage directory — Recordings can be saved to pre-defined locations most
convenient to users.

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 10

• Chapter and event marking with thumbnails — Chapters or events can be marked,
and JPEG image thumbnails in user defined resolutions are produced to promote
efficient searching and scanning.
• Record at 480p, 720p, 1080p, 1024x768, 1280x1024, or custom resolution —
Use standard video resolutions or computer resolutions and user-defined custom rates
based on content or viewing requirements.
• Stream at resolutions from 512x288 to 1080p/30 — High resolutions deliver
superior quality images for overflow applications and lower resolutions are more efficient
for streaming distribution and confidence viewing applications.
• HDMI, component, composite, and optional 3G SDI input — Provides
compatibility with common AV signal formats at resolutions up to 1920x1200 including
1080p/60. The SMP 3G SDI models offer an additional 3G SDI input connection.
• Easy to configure and operate from the front panel or external control system
— Ensure that presentations will be recorded and streamed, and valuable information
will be documented and repurposed.
• Define specific storage destinations for recorded data — Configure the SMP
to save recordings to specific storage directories based on the user environment or
application requirements.
• Recording folder playback from SMD-series decoders — Recording folders on
SMP can now be mounted as network shares on SMD-series decoders for immediate
playback of recordings.
• HDMI-embedded stereo audio or analog stereo input and output signal support
— Digital and analog audio signals are supported on the input channels and the output
channel.
• SDI audio de-embedding — Audio from an SDI source can be decoded and included
in the audio mix along with either HDMI or analog sources.
• Supports the latest SMBv2 and SMBv3 protocols for secure file sharing in
Windows environments.
• Record audio as separate m4a file — In addition to storing video with included audio
as m4p or m4v, the SMP can also record and store audio as a separate m4a file.
• Direct compatibility with hosted video platforms — Integrate publishing of
recorded media directly to third party platforms such as Panopto, Kaltura, and
Opencast.
• USB remote control port — Configure communication settings of the SMP processor
using a keyboard and mouse viewing the embedded webpage. Connect the optional
RCP 101 Series remote control panel for extended front panel operation and convenient
thumb drive access, or the vRCP FlexOS App to remotely control the SMP processor
on any device, using any browser.
• Virtual Inputs — The additional virtual input allows the SMP to record up to 4 inputs. It
also enables SMP to accept IP camera and other encoder inputs directly for recording
and re-streaming. Virtual Input feature, available with firmware v3.04 or higher, will
enable new applications in lecture capture and medical training where more than 2 input
sources are desired.
• LinkLicense for Enhanced Panopto Features — This annual support license brings
enhanced integration with the Panopto enterprise video platform to enable the SMP to
receive recording schedules from the Panopto video platform as well as streaming live
video using RTMP and RTMPS to Panopto. Basic ad-hoc recording and publishing to
Panopto and automating the system operation does not require a LinkLicense, but does
require installation of the complimentary FlexOS application framework.

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 11

• LinkLicense for Enhanced Kaltura Features — This annual support license enables
enhanced integration with the Kaltura hosted video platform including scheduling,
RTMP, and RTMPS streaming.
• LinkLicense for Horizontal Video Mirroring Upgrade — Streamlines recording by
automatically flipping video horizontally to support lightboard or other applications that
require reversal of the video image.
• iCalendar FlexOS App for ingesting iCalendar schedules — The iCalendar FlexOS
App supports manual .ics file ingest and periodic schedule ingest from Outlook, Google
Calendar and other scheduling services.
• Schedule recording and streaming — Easily import and create recording schedules
from Microsoft Exchange Server or using the iCalendar format.
• RS 232, Ethernet, and digital I/O control ports — Interface with control systems,
sensors, or external devices used in the AV presentation environment.
• Standards-based H.264 / MPEG 4 AVC video compression — The SMP supports
use of the Baseline, Main, or High Profiles at Levels 4.x, or 3.x providing the ability to
optimize video coding for use with various types of applications and decoding devices.
• Channel A buffered input loop-through — Channel A input connectors include a
buffered loop-through, for easy integration into new or legacy systems without the need
for additional AV equipment such as distribution amplifiers.
• Auto Image setup — When activated, the unit automatically analyzes the incoming
video signal and then automatically adjusts sizing, centering, and filtering to optimize
image quality. This can save time and effort in fine tuning displayed images.
• Layout presets simplify control — The SMP provides 16 standard or customizable
presets that specify the size and positioning of AV sources and metadata, simplifying
management and selection of layouts from the front panel or an external control system.
• Streaming presets — Thirty-two streaming presets combining stream destination,
protocols, and parameters are available for quick and easy setup, and switching
between live streams.
• Encoding presets for quick recall of specific compression settings — The SMP
provides 16 standard or customizable presets for saving specific encoding settings such
as H.264 profile, resolution, GOP, and bit rate session management configurations.
Users can quickly switch between these archive and confidence encoder presets to
support different applications.
• Pull streaming transport protocols — RTP/RTSP, RTSP interleaved, and HTTP
tunneled streaming transport protocols may be applied, based on various network
conditions or to aid in firewall navigation.
• Push streaming transport protocols — Native RTP, RTMP, RTMPS, or MPEG 2
Transport Streams - TS, may be applied in unicast or multicast streaming applications.
TS may be transported using UDP or RTP based on network conditions.
• Simultaneous unicast and multicast streaming per encode — The SMP supports
multiple concurrent stream modes per channel allowing simultaneous unicast and
multicast RTSP pull streaming for each encode.
• Session Announcement Protocol - SAP and Session Description Protocol - SDP
— SAP and SDP protocols simplify identification of AV source streams in unicast or
multicast push streaming applications.
• Adjustable recording and streaming bit rates — Select video bit rates from 200
Kbps to 10 Mbps for video and audio bit rates from 16 Kbps to 384 Kbps based on the
viewing application, storage, streaming, or network conditions.

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 12

• Clean switching — Switching has a clean transition between sources. Distractions
such as visual jumps, glitches, and distortion commonly experienced when switching
between computer and video sources will not be experienced when using the SMP.
• Recording metadata — Metadata can be assigned to make indexing and searching of
recordings simple including: Title, Creator, Subject, Description, Publisher, Contributor,
and Date.
• Metadata text overlay — Data concerning the recording can be presented and clearly
identified on recording layouts with AV sources and a background image.
• Uploadable background image files — Upload PNG image files at resolutions up to
1920x1080 to identify organizational or event information.
• On screen display information — Present device information and status on source
images to aid in troubleshooting and fault finding activities.
• Onscreen display video time reference — Text displaying a time and date reference
can be presented within the onscreen display in the top left corner of the output signal.
• Extended time recording — Recordings that would produce a media file size greater
than 4 GB are bundled into a recording package of sequential MP4 files.
• User configurable recording file size — Split recordings into specified files sizes.
• Automatic file management for internal storage — Storage space is automatically
created for new recordings when additional space is required. Files are deleted on a
first-in, first-out basis. Important recordings can be locked and retained indefinitely until
they are manually deleted.
• System workflow alarms — Notify monitoring systems or support staff if disk space
is low, encrypted signals are detected, AV signal errors occur, or other error conditions
exist.
• Alarm reporting — Automate communication with monitoring systems or support staff
using email, SNMP traps, or Simple Mail Transfer Protocol - SMTP messages.
• "Publish Failure" Alarm — There is a new alarm notification for a publishing failure for
transferring recordings. The new alarm can be found in the Configuration > Alarms and
Traps > Alarm Message List.
• View Temperature SIS — SIS command to view system temperature. The new
command information can be found in the SMP User Guide section Remote
Communication and Control.
• AAC audio encoding — Standards-based audio compression is used to provide
compatibility with many devices. The bit rate can be adapted to different application
requirements.
• Video encoding quality controls including video resolution, video bit rate, frame
rate, constant or variable bit rate control, GOP length, and audio bit rate —
Several user controls are available to adjust encoding quality.
• Auto Input Memory — When activated, the SMP automatically stores size, position,
and picture settings based on the incoming signal. When the same signal is detected
again, these image settings are automatically recalled from memory.
• Automatically manage EDID communication between connected devices with
EDID Minder — Automatically manage EDID communications between devices, EDID
Minder, ensuring use of optimal signal formats.
• Audio input gain and attenuation — Gain or attenuation can be adjusted for each
input signal to eliminate noticeable differences when switching between sources or
adjusting audio levels for the output stream.
• Picture controls for brightness, contrast, signal sampling, and overscan —
Sixteen user memory presets are available for each input to store all image settings.

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 13

• Aspect ratio control — The aspect ratio of a source window can be controlled by
selecting a FILL mode, which provides a full screen output, FOLLOW mode, which
preserves the aspect ratio, or FIT mode, which maintains image uniformity and zooms
into the source.
• HDCP authentication and signal presence confirmation — Provides real-time
verification of HDCP status for each digital video input and output signal. This allows
for easy signal and HDCP verification through RS 232 or Ethernet, providing valuable
feedback to a system operator or helpdesk support staff.
• HDCP Visual Confirmation — When HDCP encrypted content is transmitted to a non
HDCP compliant display, a full screen green signal is sent to the display for immediate
visual confirmation that protected content cannot be viewed on that display.
• Quad standard video decoding — A digital, five-line adaptive comb filter decodes
NTSC 3.58, NTSC 4.43, PAL, and SECAM for integration into systems worldwide.
• Internal test patterns for setup — The SMP offers test patterns as well as on-screen
display - OSD data overlay including timestamp, number of connected users, CPU
usage, network status, disk free file space, audio level, and system information to aid in
calibration and setup.
• Front panel lockout — This feature locks out either all front panel functions, Menu
functions only, or all but recording transport controls. All functions are available through
Ethernet, USB, and RS 232 control.
• Ethernet monitoring and control — The SMP is controllable over Ethernet,
supporting configuration and real-time management from a control system.
• Embedded Web interface — Provide an intuitive Web interface with an embedded
video window for viewing the live stream, as well as source input and encoding
adjustments.
• RS-232 control port — Enable the use of serial commands for integration into
a control system. Extron products use the SIS - Simple Instruction Set command
protocol, a set of basic ASCII commands that allow for quick and easy programming.
• USB keyboard and mouse ports — Configure communication settings of the SMP
using a keyboard and mouse viewing the embedded webpage from the HDMI output
connection.
• LockIt HDMI cable lacing brackets included.
• Rack-mountable 1U, full rack width metal enclosure.
• Internal Extron Everlast power supply — Provides worldwide power compatibility,
with high demonstrated reliability and low power consumption for reduced operating
cost.
• Extron Everlast Power Supply is covered by a 7 year parts and labor warranty.

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 14

Installation
This section provides information on:
• Mounting the SMP 300 Series
• Rear Panel Overview
• Rear Panel Reset

Mounting the SMP 300 Series

The SMP 300 Series models are housed in a 1U high, full rack width metal enclosure that
can sit on a table with the provided rubber feet or mounted using the attached rack mounts.
Select a suitable mounting location (see Mounting the SMP 300 Series on page 138),
then choose an appropriate mounting option.
• Before connecting the SMP 300 Series, turn off all devices that are to be connected.
• Connect all external devices to the SMP models before applying power.

Rear Panel Overview

G H
100-240V 0.8A MAX
AUDIO 3 5 OUTPUTS SMP 351
HDMI HDMI B-Y
INPUTS-CH A

MOUSE / LOOPOUT
INPUTS-CH B

KEYBOARD 1
L R 3G/HD/SDI LAN
1
DIGITAL I/O REMOTE 4
USB STORAGE RS-232 2 L R L AUDIO R L AUDIO R RESET

2 R-Y VID
1 2 3 4 G Tx Rx G /Y HDMI HDMI
50-60 Hz

A B C D E F L M J I K N O P Q
Figure 4. SMP 300 Series Rear Panel (SMP 351 3G-SDI shown)

A 100-240 VAC IEC connector for power input J (Optional input 5) 3G/HD/SDI input card
(SMP 351 3G-SDI and SMP 352 3G-SDI only)
B USB type A port for external storage device K 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw port for channel B
analog stereo audio input

C (2) USB type A ports for mouse and keyboard, or L HDMI loop thru from input 1 or 2
remote control RCP 101
D 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw port for digital I/O M 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw port for channel A
analog stereo audio loop output
E 3.5 mm, 3-pole captive screw port for Simple N HDMI preview output
Instruction Set (SIS™) control over RS‑232
F HDMI inputs 1 and 2 O 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw port for analog stereo
audio output
G 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw port for channel A P Reset button and LED
analog stereo audio input

H 3 BNC connectors for component or composite Q RJ-45 Ethernet port for LAN connection
video input 3
I HDMI input 4

SMP 300 Series • Installation 15

Power Connection
A 100-240 VAC power input (see figure 4 on page 15) — Connect the provided
IEC cord. Verify the front panel buttons and LCD illuminate (see Front Panel Menu
Operation on page 26).
Control System and External Device Connections
The SMP 300 Series can be configured and controlled from the Remote RS-232 port (see
figure 4, E on page 15) or the front panel USB mini-B Config port (see figure 8, B on
page 21) using SIS commands with DataViewer. A standard web browser can be used
for control and configuration from the LAN port. Because the LAN port must be connected
for streaming output, Extron recommends using it for configuration, remote control, and
firmware upgrades.
B USB storage device — Attach an optional external USB storage device to the front or
rear USB ports to save recorded files. The storage device can be any standard external
hard drive or USB flash drive formatted with a compatible file system.
NOTE: The SMP 300 Series can detect and record to USB storage devices using
FAT32, VFAT long file name extensions, EXT2, EXT3, EXT4 file systems, or NTFS-
formatted storage volumes. For FAT32 USB storage, file sizes must be limited to
4 GB or the recording creates multiple 4 GB files.
C USB keyboard and mouse, or RCP 101 — Connect a keyboard and mouse to the
two USB type A ports. With a keyboard and mouse connected, the user can toggle
<CtrL + ALT + S> the HDMI output (see figure 8) between the standard preview output
and the internal browser view.
D Digital I/O — Connect to the four 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw ports to provide user-
defined digital inputs or outputs (see Digital I/O Configurator on page 104).
E Remote RS-232 — Connect the host RS-232 cable to the rear panel with REMOTE
RS-232
a 3-pole captive screw connector for bidirectional (±5 V) serial host control,
to control the SMP 300 Series using SIS commands over RS‑232. Tx Rx G
The default protocol port is:
• 9600 baud • no parity • 8 data bits
• 1 stop bit • no flow control (handshaking)
P Reset button and LED — Press the button to reset the SMP 300 Series.
There are several reset modes to return the SMP to user‑defined configuration

Receive
Transmit
Ground
settings or to return all settings back to factory defaults.
The LED indicates the selected reset mode, and provides the reset status
during the reset operation (see Rear Panel Reset on page 19).
NOTE: The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have
been set to the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the
passwords convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and Roles
on page 86 to change a password).
Q RJ-45 Ethernet connector (LAN) — Use a standard Ethernet cable to connect to a
network. The default network settings are:
IP Address: 192.168.254.254
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0
DHCP: OFF
NOTE: To connect the SMP 300 Series directly to a computer Ethernet port, use a
crossover Ethernet cable (see Connection Options on page 106).

SMP 300 Series • Installation 16

Input Connections
The audio and video inputs are grouped into channel A and channel B (see figure 4 on
page 15).
• Channel A analog audio input can be selected for video inputs 1 or 2 (F).
• Channel B analog audio can be selected for video inputs 3 (H), 4 (I), or 5 (J).
F HDMI input (1 and 2) — Connect an HDMI (or DVI with suitable adapter) source device
to input 1 and input 2.
NOTE: Channel A (inputs 1 and 2) is optimized for full range sources such as PCs.
When using a video source with adjustable quantization range on these inputs,
select "Full Range" for the most accurate video reproduction.
G Channel A analog audio input — Connect a balanced or unbalanced stereo line
level audio device to this 5-pole, 3.5 mm captive screw port. Channel A audio can be
selected for output with HDMI inputs 1 and 2 instead of the embedded audio. Wire the
connector as shown in figure 5.
Tip Tip
Ring Left Sleeve Left
Sleeve(s)
Tip Right Tip Right
Ring Sleeve Do not tin the wires!
Balanced Stereo Input Unbalanced Stereo Input
(high impedance) (high impedance)

Figure 5. Audio Input Captive Screw Connector Wiring

H Analog video input 3 — Connect component video to the three BNC connectors (B-Y,
R-Y, VID/Y). Connect a composite video signal to the VID/Y BNC connector.
I HDMI input 4 — Connect an HDMI (or DVI with suitable adapter) source device to
input 4.
J Serial digital video input 5 (SMP 351 3G-SDI and SMP 352 3G-SDI only) —
Connect a 3G/HD/SDI video signal to this BNC connector.
K Channel B analog and 3G-SDI audio input — Connect a balanced or unbalanced
stereo line level audio device to this 5-pole, 3.5 mm captive screw port. Channel B
audio can be selected from either the HDMI embedded audio, Ch B analog audio, or
the audio can be set to Off. Wire the connector as shown in figure 5.

Output Connections
L HDMI loop-thru output — Connect an HDMI (or DVI with suitable adapter) display
device to the HDMI Loop Thru output to view the selected input 1 or input 2.
M Audio loop output — Connect a balanced or unbalanced stereo line level audio device
to this 5-pole, 3.5 mm captive screw port. Wire the connector as shown in figure 6.
Audio is always from audio input (G).

ATTENTION:
• For unbalanced audio, connect the sleeves to the ground contact. DO NOT
connect the sleeves to the negative (–) contacts.
• Pour l’audio asymétrique connectez les manchons au contact au sol. Ne PAS
connecter les manchons aux contacts négatifs (–).

Tip Tip
Ring Left NO Ground Here Left
Sleeve(s) Sleeve(s)
Tip Right Tip Right
Ring NO Ground Here Do not tin the wires!
Balanced Audio Output Unbalanced Audio Output

Figure 6. Audio Output Captive Screw Connector Wiring

SMP 300 Series • Installation 17

 ATTENTION:
• The length of the exposed wires in the stripping process is important. The
ideal length is 3/16 inch (5 mm). If longer, the exposed wires may touch,
causing a short circuit between them. If shorter, the wires can be easily pulled
out even if tightly fastened by the captive screws.
• La longueur des câbles exposés est importante lorsque l’on entreprend de
les dénuder. La longueur idéale est de 5 mm (3/16 inches). S’ils sont trop
longs, les câbles exposés pourraient se toucher et provoquer un court circuit.
S’ils sont trop courts, ils pourraient sortir, même s’ils sont attachés par les vis
captives.
• Do not tin the wires. Tinned wires are not as secure in the captive screw
terminals and could pull out.
• Ne pas étamer les câbles. Les câbles étamés ne sont pas aussi bien fixés
dans les terminaisons des à vis captives et pourraient sortir.

N HDMI preview output — Connect an HDMI (or DVI with suitable adapter) display
device to this HDMI output (see figure 4 on page 15). Using an attached USB
keyboard and mouse, the preview output can be switched between a preview of the
recorded content and an internal browser client.
O Analog audio output — Connect a balanced or unbalanced stereo line level audio
device to this 5-pole 3.5 mm captive screw port (see figure 6 on page 17 for wiring
information) for select audio output.
The audio output depends both on the input selection and if the embedded audio or
analog audio is selected for that input (see Audio Select on page 43). Audio output
is selected from channel A, channel B, or a mix of both channel A and channel B. For
the SMP 352 and SMP 351 with LinkLicense, with dual mono enabled, audio output
is selected from channel B dual mono or a mix of both channel A and channel B dual
mono.
NOTE: The default audio channel is channel A and channel B. When dual mode is
enabled, the default output is channel A and channel B dual mono.

SMP 300 Series • Installation 18

Rear Panel Reset
The Reset button on the rear panel of the SMP 300 Series (see figure 4 on page 15)
returns the SMP 300 Series to various modes of operation. There are three unit reset modes
(numbered 1, 4, and 5) that are initiated from the rear panel reset button. To select different
reset modes, use a pointed stylus or small screwdriver to press and hold the Reset button
when the SMP 300 Series is powered on or press and hold the Reset button while applying
power to the SMP 300 Series.
NOTES:
• The reset modes listed in the SMP 300 Series Reset Modes table on page 20
close all open IP and Telnet connections and all sockets. The table has details
comparing the reset modes and detailing affected configuration settings and user
content.
• Each reset mode is a separate reset (not a continuation from mode 1 to mode 5).
• Reset modes 2 and 3 are not available for the SMP 300 Series.
• The SMP 300 Series can also be reset using the web-based user interface (see
System Resets on page 102).
• For information on resetting the SMP 300 Series using SIS commands see Resets
on page 116.

ATTENTION:
• Review the reset modes carefully. Some reset modes delete all user loaded
content and revert the device to default configuration.
• Analysez minutieusement les différents modes de réinitialisation. Certains modes
de réinitialisation suppriment l’intégralité du contenu chargé de l’utilisateur et
remettent l’appareil au mode de configuration par défaut.

See figure 7 and the SMP 300 Series Reset Modes table for a summary of the reset
modes.

Mode 1
RESET RESET
Press and hold Apply power
Release Reset button.
the Reset button. to the SMP.

Mode 4 Release, then immediately

Reset LED flashes twice. press and release again.
Reset LED flashes, then goes off.

RESET RESET RESET

Press and hold
for 6 seconds.

Mode 5 Release, then immediately

Reset LED flashes three press and release again.
times. Reset LED flashes, then goes off.

RESET RESET RESET

Press and hold
for 9 seconds.

Figure 7. Resetting the SMP 300 Series

SMP 300 Series • Installation 19

 SMP 300 Series Reset Modes
Mode Activation Result Purpose and Notes
1 Hold in the recessed rear The SMP 300 Series reverts to the Use mode 1 to revert to
Factory Firmware

panel Reset button while factory default firmware for a single the factory default firmware
applying power to the unit. power cycle. for a single power cycle if
incompatibility issues arise
with user-loaded firmware.
All user files and settings are
maintained.

NOTE: Do not operate with the default firmware loaded by a mode 1 reset. Use it only to load the
most current firmware to the device.

*4 Hold in the Reset button Sets the following back to back to Mode 4 is used to set
until the Reset LED blinks factory default. IP address information using
twice (once at 3 seconds, • Port mapping ARP and the MAC address.
Reset All IP Settings

again at 6 seconds). Then, Resetting IP Settings

release and press the • IP address: 192.168.254.254
appears on a connected
Reset button again within 1 • Subnet mask address: display.
second*. 255.255.0.0
• Gateway IP address: 0.0.0.0
Turns DHCP off.
The Reset LED on the rear panel
of the unit flashes four times in
succession.
*5 Hold in the Reset button Performs a complete reset to factory Mode 5 is useful to start over
until the Reset LED blinks defaults (except the firmware). with default configuration and
Reset to Factory Defaults

three times (once at 3 • Does everything mode 4 does. uploading, and also to replace
seconds, again at 6 seconds, events.
again at 9 seconds). Then, • Clears port configurations.
Resetting SMP 300 Series
release and press the • Resets all IP options. appears on a connected
Reset button again within 1 display.
• Resets all passwords.
second*.
• Clears all user settings. Mode 5 is equivalent to SIS
command ZQQQ (see SIS
• Clears all files from the unit.
command Absolute reset on
• The Reset LED on the rear panel page 116).
of the unit flashes four times in
succession.

NOTES:
• *For modes 4 and 5, nothing happens if the momentary press does not occur within 1 second.
• The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have been set to the device serial
number. In the event of a complete system reset, the passwords convert to the default, which is no
password (see Users and Roles on page 86 to change a password).

SMP 300 Series • Installation 20

Front Panel Operation

This section of the manual discusses the operation of the SMP 300 Series from the front
panel.
Topics covered include:
• Front Panel Features
• Layout Presets (For Composite Mode Only)
• Power Up Procedure
• Front Panel Menu Operation
• Front Panel Lockout (Executive Modes)
• Alarms

Front Panel Features

Extron CHANNEL A AUDIO ADJUST SMP 351
1 2 L R LAYO UT
P RE SE T
MENU I/O
1
Streaming Media Processor

CHANNEL B 2
USB STORAGE
CONFIG
3 4 5 MARK S WA P NEXT 3
4

A B C D E F G H I J
Figure 8. SMP 300 Series Front Panel
A Type A USB connector and activity LED for F Layout Preset and Swap buttons
external storage

B USB mini B connector for configuration G Menu display

C Input buttons for source selection H Menu navigation buttons (MENU and NEXT)

D Record controls with LED indicators I Adjust knobs (left [ and right {)

E Audio level indicators J I/O display LEDs

A USB storage port and activity LED — Connect a USB compatible media device to
this port. The green LED blinks during both reading and writing of data. The storage
device can be any standard external hard drive or USB flash drive formatted with a
compatible file system.
NOTE: The SMP 300 Series can detect and record to USB storage devices
using FAT32, VFAT long file name extensions, EXT2, EXT3, EXT4 file systems,
or NTFS‑formatted storage volumes. For FAT32 USB storage, file sizes must be
limited to 4 GB or the recording creates multiple 4 GB files.

ATTENTION:
• Disconnecting a USB device while recording to it may result in corrupt or lost
data.
• Déconnecter un périphérique USB alors qu’un enregistrement y est effectué,
peut engendrer une altération ou une perte de données.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 21

B Config port (see figure 8 on page 21)— Connect a control device to this port with a
USB mini-B cable (not supplied). Use this port to send SIS commands to the SMP 300
Series for device configuration and control (see Remote Communication and
Control starting on page 106).
C Input selection — Press these buttons to select inputs associated with the rear panel
input ports.
• Channel A — Press the corresponding button to select HDMI input 1 or 2. If
analog audio (instead of embedded audio) is selected for an input, Channel A
analog audio is output with the video.
• Channel B — Press the corresponding button to select composite/component
input 3, HDMI input 4, and (optional) SDI input 5. If analog audio is selected for
input 4, Channel B analog audio is output with the selected video input.
The currently selected Channel A input button and currently selected Channel B input
button light solid amber.
NOTE: Input 5 lights only when the optional SDI input card is installed and the input
is selected.
D Record controls with LED indicators — Press the Record, Stop, Pause, and Mark
buttons to perform the operation. The buttons light to indicate the current state of
record operation.
• Record — Press to record the selected inputs. The record button lights solid
red during active recording.
• Stop — Press to stop the active recording. When pressed during a recording,
the stop button blinks green while the recorded file is being finalized, then lights
solid green when the file is finalized.

• Pause — Press to pause recording. When pressed, the Pause button blinks
green to indicate recording is paused. Press Record or press Pause again to
resume recording, or press Stop to halt the recording.
MA RK
• Mark — Press to place a chapter marker in the recorded file. When pressed
during recording, the button illuminates green momentarily to indicate a chapter
marker is inserted. The button also illuminates when JPEG thumbnails are
automatically created at a fixed interval (default: 1 minute).
NOTE: The SMP does not create chapter marks or capture thumbnails on
virtual input recordings.
E Audio level indicators — Two stacks of eight green LEDs track the audio level of the
left and right audio channels from -60 dBFS (one LED) to 0 dBFS (eight LEDs). The
LEDs indicate both signal presence and active input signal levels.
• Input Configuration Mode — When input gain is adjusted, the meters display the
currently selected input left and right channel audio levels to assist setting audio
gain (see Audio Level on page 43).
• Normal Mode — The meters display the left and right encoder input levels
measured after all audio input adjustments are applied and audio sources are
blended or merged (if applicable).
F Layout Preset (for composite mode only) and Swap — Press LAYOUT PRESET to
select one of the 16 capture presets (see Layout Presets (For Composite Mode
Only) on page 23). The button illuminates green. Use the ADJUST knobs (see
figure 8, I on page 23) to select the desired output layout. Press NEXT (H) to
activate it.
Press SWAP to switch Channel A and B inputs between the two layout windows. The
button illuminates green for 1 second to indicate the input swap.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 22

 G Menu display — Displays configuration menus and status information. Use the MENU
and NEXT buttons (see figure 8 on page 21, H) and ADJUST knobs (I) to navigate
the menu. During normal operation, a default display cycle is presented (see Power Up
Procedure on page 25). If there is an active alarm (see Alarms on page 49), it is
listed instead.
H Menu navigation (MENU and NEXT) — Lights amber (unless menu lockout is
enabled). Press to access and navigate the configuration and control menus and
submenus.
NOTE: The menu button blinks red when there is an active alarm (see Alarms).
• MENU — Use this button to enter and move through the main menu system.
• NEXT — Use this button to step through the submenus of the selected menu.
I Adjust knobs (left [ and right {) — Rotate these controls to scroll through menus
and to make adjustments within a menu or submenu.
NOTE: The buttons and controls on the SMP 300 Series can be locked so that
configuration using the front panel is not possible (see Front Panel Lockout
(Executive Modes) on page 49).

J I/O display — A stack of four green LEDs that correspond to the four digital I/O
connections on the rear panel (see figure 4 on page 15). Each LED indicates the
on or off status of the corresponding ports which can be configured as digital input or
digital output (see Digital I/O Configurator on page 104).

Layout Presets (For Composite Mode Only)

Layout presets define which inputs are selected and where they are placed on the output
screen. There are 12 preconfigured and 4 user presets for custom layout configurations.
n CHANNEL A AUDIO ADJUST SMP 351
1 2 L R LAY O U T
P R E SE T
MENU I/O
1
Streaming Media Processor

CHANNEL B 2
AGE
CONFIG
3 4 5 MARK S WA P NEXT 3
4

A B C D E F G H I J
Figure 9. Front Panel Layout Preset and Swap
The two input channels, A and B, are determined by direct selection from the front panel.
To select 1 of the 12 preconfigured layout presets:
1. Select input 1 or 2 for channel A and input 3, 4, or 5 for channel B (see figure 4).
2. Press LAYOUT PRESET (see figure 9, F) to open the menu on the front panel display
(G).
3. Use either ADJUST knob (I) to cycle through the presets. When the desired layout
name appears on the output display, stop.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 23

 PBP Upper Left <1> PBP Mid Right <4> Side by Side <7> Fullscreen B <10>
PbP 25%, main window 75% PbP 25%, main window 75% Windows horizontally centered main window 100%
Ch. B
16:9
Ch. A Ch. B
METADATA
METADATA 16:9 16:9 Ch. A Ch. B Ch. B
Ch. A 16:9 16:9 16:9
METADATA
16:9 METADATA

METADATA,
MORE METADATA

PBP Upper Right <2> PIP Upper Left <5> Side by Side (1) <8> CH A Center <11>
PbP 25%, main window 75% PiP 25%, main window 100% Windows horizontally centered main window 75%, centered in screen
Ch. B Ch. B METADATA,
MORE METADATA
16:9 16:9
Ch. A
METADATA
16:9 METADATA Ch. A Ch. A Ch. B Ch. A
16:9 16:9 16:9 16:9

METADATA, MORE METADATA

PBP Mid Left <3> PIP Upper Right <6> Fullscreen A <9> CH B Center <12>
PbP 25%, main window 75% PiP 25%, main window 100% main window 100% main window 75%, centered in screen
Ch. B
16:9
Ch. B
16:9 Ch. A Ch. A Ch. B
Ch. A 16:9 16:9 16:9
METADATA
METADATA 16:9

METADATA, MORE METADATA

Figure 10. Layout Presets

NOTE: PBP = Picture Beside Picture
PIP = Picture In Picture
4. Press NEXT (see figure 9, H on page 23) to select the layout.
5. If desired, press SWAP to reverse the screen position of the A and B input selections.
To store a custom layout configuration:
1. Select the layout from the above configurations closest to your requirements.
2. Change the window size and centering adjustments for each input to modify the layout
as needed (see Picture Control Menu on page 30),
3. Press and hold LAYOUT PRESET for 3 seconds to enter the saved layout menu.
4. Use either ADJUST knob to select the desired preset location to store the new layout.
5. Press Next to save the new layout.
NOTE: In order to preserve the aspect ratios of the windows, some layouts can
have slightly different spacing at lower resolutions. It is recommended to save
custom layouts at the resolution at which they are to be recalled.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 24

Power Up Procedure
NOTE: Before powering the SMP 300 Series, ensure that all necessary devices are
connected properly. Devices do not need to be powered.
Connect the power cord to a 100 to 240 VAC supply (see Power Connection on
page 16). The unit undergoes self testing during the boot sequence (see figure 11 and
figure 12). After the sequence is complete (and when the device is not being configured or
has an active alarm), the default display cycle is on the LCD display.
2
Power EXTRON sec. EXTRON
On ELECTRONICS SMP 35x FW V1.06 Default Display Cycle
~4
sec. 2
In 1 1024x768@60 sec. ARCHIVE 5.0 MB
30 45
LOADING sec. SMP 35x sec. In 3 720p@60 1280x720@30 fps
FIRMWARE INITIALIZING 2 sec. 2 sec.
2
TIME REMAIN sec. TIME RECORD
HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS

Figure 11. Boot Sequence and Default Display Cycle for Composite Mode

NOTE: The information shown in the default display cycle differs depending on
the active input and the type of video signal. Time Record only displays during a
recording. Time Remain displays the remaining time in the event and the estimated
recording time available during an unscheduled recording.

2
Power EXTRON sec. EXTRON
On ELECTRONICS SMP 35x FW V1.06 Default Display Cycle
~4
sec. 2
In 1 1024x768@60 sec. CHA 5.0 MB 2 sec.
30 45 In 3 720p@60 1280x720@30 fps
LOADING sec. SMP 352 sec.
CHB 5.0 MB
FIRMWARE INITIALIZING 2 sec. 2 sec.
1280x720@30 fps
2
TIME REMAIN sec. TIME RECORD 2 sec.
HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS

Figure 12. Boot Sequence and Default Display Cycle for Dual Channel Mode
The default display cycle varies depending on the input video signal and output stream
selection. It shows the selected inputs and their resolutions, stream bit rate, and output
resolution. During recording, the current length of the recording and time remaining are
added to the default cycle.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 25

 Front Panel Menu Operation
Configuration and adjustments can be AUDIO
Extron CHANNEL A ADJUST

performed using the 2

1 embedded web pages (see L R LAY O UT
P R ESET
M EN U I/O
1
Streaming Medi

Overview of the 3Web-Based User Interface

CHANNEL B 2
USB STORAGE
4 5
CONFIG MARK S WA P N EX T 3
4
on page 52), SIS commands (see Remote
Communication and Control starting on
A or
page 106), Bthe frontCpanel controls
D and E the F G H I J
menus displayed on the LCD screen (see image
at the right, G). These menus are used primarily
during the initial set up.

Menu Navigation
G Menu display — Displays the configuration menus on a 16x2 LCD display.
H Navigation buttons —
• MENU button — Press to activate menus and cycle through the main menus.
• NEXT button — Press to move between the submenus of the selected main
menu.
I ADJUST knobs ([,{) — In configuration mode, rotate the left ([) control and right ({)
control to scroll through submenu options and to make configuration selections (see the
flowcharts in this chapter for details).

Menu Overview
After start-up, when no adjustments are actively being made, the Default Display Cycle
(see figure 13 below and figure 14 on page 27) runs on the Menu display LCD (G). The
screen progressively cycles through the input and output format information, showing the
number and video format of the active input and the current output resolution.
NOTE: If a signal is not present on the currently selected input, NOT DETECTED appears
in place of the input type. For example, IN#4 NOT DETECTED.
If there is an active recording, TIME RECORD displays the current length of the recording.
TIME REMAIN shows the time remaining for an active scheduled recording.

EXTRON
351 FW V1.00 Default Display Cycle
2
In#1 1024x768@60 sec. ARCHIVE 5.0 MB
45
SMP 351 sec. In#3 720p@60 1280x720@30 fps
ITIALIZING 2 sec. 2 sec.
2
TIME REMAIN sec. TIME RECORD
on shown in the default display cycle differs HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS
ctive input and the type of video signal.
ys only during a recording.
ays the remaining time in the event and the
g time available during an unscheduled
Figure 13. Default Display Cycle for Composite Mode

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 26

ec. EXTRON
SMP 35x FW V1.06 Default Display Cycle
4
ec. 2
In 1 1024x768@60 sec. CHA 5.0 MB 2 sec.
0 45 In 3 720p@60 1280x720@30 fps
ec. SMP 352 sec.
CHB 5.0 MB
INITIALIZING 2 sec. 2 sec.
1280x720@30 fps
2
TIME REMAIN sec. TIME RECORD 2 sec.
HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS

Figure 14. Default Display Cycle for Dual Channel Mode

Press the MENU button once to bring up the first main (top level) menu, as shown below.
Each successive MENU button press cycles to the next main menu.
NOTE: From any menu or submenu, after 30 seconds of inactivity, the SMP 300 Series
times‑out to the default display cycle.

0(18 PICTURE 0(18 RECORD/STREAM 0(18 INPUT 0(18

PRESETS
CONTROL CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION
1(;7 1(;7 1(;7
(to submenus) (to submenus) (to submenus) (to submenus)

0HQX

EXIT MENU? 0(18 0(18 VIEW COMM 0(18 ADVANCED 0(18 BACKGROUND (For Composite
STATUS
PRESS NEXT SETTINGS CONFIGURATION RECALL Mode Only)
1(;7 1(;7 1(;7 1(;7 1(;7
(to submenus) (to submenus) + (to submenus) (to submenus)
Input 5
for Edit Menu

Figure 15. Top Level Menus

The flowchart above provides an overview of the menu system.
The top level menus are displayed one at a time, in order, on the LCD panel by pressing the
MENU front panel button.
To return to the default cycle from a top level menu or submenu, press MENU repeatedly until
EXIT MENU? shows, then press NEXT. Alternatively, the menu times out after 30 seconds of
inactivity and returns to the default cycle.
Press NEXT when a menu displays to access its submenu. Within the submenu, press MENU
to exit the submenu and return to the currently active menu or press NEXT to move to the
next submenu.
Submenu details with configuration and options for each setting are on the following pages.
A complete schematic of the menus and submenus is in the reference section (see Front
Panel Menu Diagrams starting on page 160).

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 27

Presets Menu
The presets menu allows the user to save or recall encoder and user presets.
• From the default menu, press MENU to cycle to the Presets menu.
• Press NEXT to enter the submenus.
• Press NEXT to advance to the relevant submenu: Recall or Save.
• Within the submenu, use the ADJUST controls to select the preset, then press NEXT to
recall or save the selection.
• Press MENU to exit the submenu.
MENU MENU
PRESETS PRESETS
NEXT NEXT

ARCHIVE ENCODER CHA ARCHIVE ENCODER

RECALL <N/A>NEXT
RECALL <N/A>
Rotate either to Rotate horizontal knob to select
select a preset to recall. encoder. Rotate vertical knob to
select a preset to recall.
NEXT
NEXT
ARCHIVE ENCODER CHA ARCHIVE ENCODER
SAVE <N/A> SAVE <N/A>
Rotate either to select Rotate horizontal knob to select
a preset # to save encoder. Rotate vertical knob to
current settings to. select a preset to recall.
NEXT NEXT
IN<1> USER RECALL
<N/A> IN<1> USER RECALL
<N/A>
Rotate [ to select an
Rotate [ to select an
input.
input.
Rotate { to select a preset.
Rotate { to select a preset.
NEXT
NEXT
IN<1> USER SAVE
<N/A> IN<1> USER SAVE
<N/A>
Rotate [ to select an
input.
Rotate [ to select an
Rotate { to select a preset. input.
Rotate { to select a preset.
NEXT
NEXT

Figure 16. Presets Menu in Figure 17. Presets Menu in Dual

Composite Mode Channel Mode

Encoder presets
Encoder presets allow users to quickly switch between various encoder profiles for different
resolution and bit rates. There are 32 encoder presets for different streaming and recording
applications. Presets 33 through 42 are factory default presets to support Panopto quality
settings.
Encoder presets save the following parameters:

ENCODER PRESETS
Video Resolution Profile Type Record Mode
Video Bit Rate Profile Level GOP Length
Frame Rate Audio Bit Rate Preset Name
Bit Rate Control Audio Delay IDR Interval

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 28

 Default encoder presets
The first 18 encoder presets are predefined.
Preset 3 is the default value for the Archive Encoder (Channel A and Channel B).
Preset 9 is the default value for the Confidence Encoder (Streaming = on by default).

Preset Preset Name Resolution Video Frame Audio Bit GOP H.264 H.264
# Bit Rate Rate Bit Rate Rate Length Profile Level
(kbps) (fps) (kbps) Control
1 1080p High 1920x1080 8000 30 320 VBR 30 High 4.1
2 1080p Low 1920x1080 6000 15 128 CVBR 30 Main 3.2
*3 720p High 1280x720 5000 30 192 VBR 30 High 3.1
4 720p Low 1280x720 3000 15 128 CVBR 30 Main 3.1
5 480p High 848x480 2500 30 128 VBR 30 High 3.1
6 480p Low 848x480 1500 15 80 CVBR 30 Main 3.1
7 VGA High 1280x1024 3500 30 128 VBR 30 High 4.1
8 VGA Low 1024x768 2500 15 128 VBR 30 High 3.1
9 Confidence 512x288 350 15 192 VBR 15 Base 3.0
10 Speaker 1080p 1920x1080 5000 30 192 VBR 60 High 3.0
11 Speaker 720p 1280x720 2500 30 192 VBR 60 High 3.0
12 Speaker 480p 848x480 1000 30 192 VBR 60 Main 3.0
13 Presentation 1080p 1920x1080 2000 15 192 VBR 30 Main 3.0
14 Presentation 720p 1280x720 1000 15 192 VBR 30 Main 3.0
15 Presentation 480p 848x480 600 15 192 VBR 30 Main 3.0
16 Presentation 1440x180 1600 15 192 VBR 30 Main 3.0
1440x180
17 Presentation 1280x1024 1200 15 192 VBR 30 Main 3.0
1280x1024
18 Presentation 1024x768 1000 15 192 VBR 30 Main 3.0
1024x768
19-32 User Defined

NOTES:
• *Audio settings are determined by the encoding for the primary recording or stream. Audio for confidence
monitoring is not re-encoded. Therefore, by default, the recording uses encoder preset 3, and the audio bit
rate is 192 kbps.
• Default record mode is video and audio.
• The predefined encoder presets can be modified by the user. If necessary, a factory reset returns all changes
to the above table values.

User presets
User presets save current settings or recall previously saved configurations for the selected
input. User presets can be saved on one input rate and recalled on a different input rate.
There are 16 user presets per input.
User presets save the following parameters (per input):
• Color • Preset name
• Tint • Aspect ratio
• Contrast • Brightness

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 29

 To save a user preset from the front panel:
1. From the Picture Control menu, configure the selected input as desired (see Input
Configuration Menu on page 39).
2. Press MENU to cycle through the main menus to the Presets menu.
3. Press NEXT to cycle to the User Save submenu.
4. Rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to select the input.
NOTE: Only the selected front panel channel A and the selected channel B inputs
are available.
5. Use the right ({) ADJUST knob to select one of the 16 user presets.
6. Press NEXT to save the new preset values.
Each input has sixteen user preset locations available. A configuration can be saved to any
preset number using this menu, the embedded web pages, or via SIS. Select N/A and press
NEXT to exit without saving settings.
To recall a user preset from the front panel:
1. Press MENU to cycle through the main menus to the Presets menu.
2. Press NEXT to cycle to the User Recall submenu.
3. Rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to select the input.
NOTE: Only the selected front panel channel A and the selected channel B inputs
are available.
4. Use the left ({) ADJUST knob to select one of the sixteen user presets.
5. Press NEXT to select the new preset for the input.
Each input has 16 user presets recalled using this menu, the web pages, or via SIS. Select
N/A and press NEXT to exit without applying the user preset settings.

Picture Control Menu

The Picture Control menu includes all picture 0(18 PICTURE 0(18
settings such as color, tint, brightness,PRESETS
and contrast. In CONTROL
composite mode, it allows the user to adjust horizontal
1(;7 1(;7
and vertical window positioning along with horizontal
and vertical window size for the selected input (see
Layout Presets (For Composite 0(18 Mode Only) on 0(18
ENCODER RECALL CHANNEL SELECT
page 23). <N/A> <A> <ON>
Rotate either to Rotate = to select a channel.
From the Picture Control menu, press NEXT
select ato
preset. Rotate ] to turn the channel
move to the desired submenu. Press 0(18 to recall the
selected preset.
on or off.

1(;7 to continue.
In full screen mode, only channel A or only Press
channel B 1(;7
0(18 ENCODER 0(18
is displayed. If both channels are active, useSAVE
<N/A>
the H POSITION [A] V
<+0000> <+0000>
Channel Select submenu and either adjustment Rotate either to select a Rotate = to adjust Horizontal
control to select between channel A and B.preset
Theto save current Position.
settings to. Rotate ] to adjust Vertical
submenu displays the status of the selectedPress window.
0(18 to save the Position.
the new preset. 1(;7
Within the submenu, use the ADJUST knobsPress
to 1(;7
select
to continue.

and change values as required.

Press MENU to exit the submenu.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 30

The Channel Select submenu is available for all inputs. Subsequent picture control
submenus are available depending on the input selection (see the following table).
Range YUVp/ YUVi Composite HDMI
HDTV Video
Position * X X X X
Size Vert:64 to 4096 X X X X
Horz:120 to 4096
Brightness 0 to 127 X X X X
Contrast 0 to 127 X X X X
Color 0 to 127 X X
Tint 0 to 127 NTSC Only

NOTES:
• * The position range depends on the selected resolution.
• X indicates applicable picture controls for the input type.
• The position and size values are for archive encoding.

Channel select
This submenu selects the input channel for the remainder of the submenus.
Rotate either ADJUST knob to select channel A and channel B.

Picture position (composite mode only)

This submenu sets the horizontal (H) and vertical (V) position of the active video for the
selected channel. The maximum value depends on the archive encoder resolution. The
range is dynamically adjusted to ensure at least 32x32 pixels of the window stay on the
screen. A small window (for example, 300 pixels wide) cannot go far into the negative (in this
case it is limited to -268 pixels).
To use this submenu:
• Rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to change the horizontal position of the video for
the selected input. The selected value relates to the left edge of the active video. The
default is 0000.
• Rotate the right ({) ADJUST knob to change the vertical position of the video for the
selected input. The selected value relates to the top edge of the active video. The
default is 0000.

Picture size (composite mode only)

The Size submenu is used to set the horizontal and vertical size of the active video for the
selected input.
To use this submenu:
• Rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to change the horizontal size of the video for the
selected input. The range of settings is dependent on the output resolution.
• Rotate the right ({) ADJUST knob to change the vertical size of the video for the
selected input. The range of settings is dependent on the output resolution.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 31

Brightness and contrast
This submenu is used to adjust the brightness and contrast of the active video for the
selected input.
To use this submenu:
• Rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to change the brightness of the video for the selected
input. The range of settings is 000 to 127. The default is 064.
• Rotate the right ({) ADJUST knob to change the contrast of the video for the selected
input. The range of settings is 000 to 127. The default is 064.

Color and tint

This submenu is used to adjust the color and tint of the active video for the selected input.
NOTES:
• The color adjustment is only available for composite and YUV video signal inputs.
• The tint adjustment is only available for composite NTSC video signal inputs. Tint is
not available for PAL video signal inputs.
To use this submenu:
• Rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to adjust the color of the video for the selected input.
When this configuration option is set to 0, colors appear as shades of gray. The range
of settings is 000 to 127. The default is 064.
• Rotate the right ({) ADJUST knob to adjust the tint (appearance of colors) of the video
for the selected input. The range of settings is 000 to 127. The default is 064.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 32

Record and Stream Configuration Menu
This menu allows the user RECORD/STREAM Menu
CONFIGURATION
to configure the archive NEXT
(recording) and confidence
encodes. ENCODER
<ARCHIVE>
-OR-
ENCODER
<CONFIDENCE>

Use either Adjust knob Rotate either to

select encoder type.
Rotate either to
select encoder type.
NEXT
to change the selections. NEXT
ENCODER MODE STREAMING
Press Next to enter <COMPOSITE> <ON>
Rotate either to
changes and move to
Rotate either to
select Composite or Dual mode. select mode.
NEXT
the next submenu. Press NEXT
RECORDING STREAM METHOD
Menu to enter changes and <SINGLE> <PULL>
Rotate either to Rotate either to
return to the main menu. select Off, Single, or Secondary mode. select push or pull
NEXT streaming.
NEXT

The flow chart on the RECORD TO 71.75 GB

<INTERNAL>
STREAM PROTOCOL
<UNI RTP/UDP>
right shows all possible Rotate [ to select Auto, Internal, or External location. Rotate either to
Rotate { to select a volume on the external location. select protocol to follow
submenus for the RECORD/ NEXT
NEXT stream method.

STREAM CONFIGURATION STREAMING

<ON>
DESTINATION IP
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
menu. Rotate either to Rotate [ to select octet.
select mode. Rotate { to change address.
NEXT
Subsequent submenus NEXT
STREAM METHOD RESOLUTION
are hidden or displayed <PULL> <512x288>
Rotate either to select Rotate either to
depending on previous push or pull streaming. select streaming
NEXT NEXT resolution.
submenu selections. STREAM PROTOCOL FRAME RATE
<MULTI RTP/UDP> <15>
Rotate either to select Rotate either to
protocol to follow stream select streaming
method.
NEXT NEXT frame rate.
MULTICAST IP VID BITRATE AUD
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX <350> <192>
Rotate [ to select octet. Rotate [ to change video bitrate.
Rotate { to change address. Rotate { to change audio bitrate.
NEXT NEXT

OUTPUT MODE
<AUDIO/VIDEO>
Rotate either to select audio
and video, or video only.
NEXT
AUDIO OUTPUT
<B ONLY>
Rotate either to select ChA, ChB or A+B
(Channel B dual mono disabled).
NEXT
RESOLUTION
<1280x720>
Rotate either to
select recording resolution.
NEXT
FRAME RATE
<30>
Rotate either to
select frame rate.
NEXT
VID BITRATE AUD
<5000> <384>
Rotate [ to change video bitrate.
Rotate { to change audio bitrate.

NEXT

Encoder select menu

This submenu determines the purpose of the encoded stream. The subsequent encoder
configuration submenus are dependent on this setting.
Select one of the following:
• Archive — Provides the highest quality stream but uses the most bandwidth and
resources. The settings also apply to the recordings.
• Confidence — Provides a lower quality stream, typically for confidence monitoring.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 33

Recording mode
RECORD/STREAM MENU
CONFIGURATION
NEXT

ENCODER
<ARCHIVE>
Rotate either to
select encoder type.
NEXT
ENCODER MODE ENCODER MODE
<COMPOSITE> <DUAL>
Rotate either to select
Composite or Dual channel Mode.
NEXT

RECORDING RECORDING RECORDING

<OFF> <SINGLE> <Internal +2nd>
Rotate either to select Off, Single, or
Secondary recording mode.
NEXT NEXT
RECORD TO 71.75 GB RECORD TO 71.75 GB
<INTERNAL> INTERNAL
Rotate [ to select Auto, Internal, or External location. Display only.
Rotate { to select a volume on the external location.
NEXT NEXT
STREAMING NEXT 2ND REC TO X.XX GB
<ON> USBFRONT <VOL NAME>
Rotate either to Rotate either to select among
select mode. multiple volumes on a drive.
NEXT

Figure 18. Recording Submenus for Composite Mode

RECORD/STREAM MENU
CONFIGURATION
NEXT

ENCODER
<ARCHIVE>
Rotate either to
select encoder type.
NEXT
ENCODER MODE ENCODER MODE
<COMPOSITE> <DUAL>
Rotate either to select
Channel Mode.
NEXT

RECORDING RECORDING
<OFF> <SINGLE>
Rotate either to
select Off, Single, or Secondary mode.
NEXT
RECORD TO 71.75 GB
<INTERNAL>
Rotate [ to select Auto, Internal, or External location.
Rotate { to select a volume on the external location.
NEXT
STREAMING
<ON>
Rotate either to
select mode.
NEXT

Figure 19. Recording Submenus for Dual Channel Mode

The Encoder Archive mode submenu contains options for directing the recording to a
storage location. Rotate either selection knob to select Composite (see figure 18) or Dual
Channel (see figure 19) mode.
If Composite mode is selected, rotate either selection knob to select:
• Single — The archive stream is recorded to the internal drive only (default).
• Secondary — The archive stream is recorded to the internal drive and the drive
connected to one of the USB ports (front, rear, or RCP).
• Off — Recording is off.
NOTE: If Dual Channel mode is selected, rotate either knob to select Single or Off.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 34

Subsequent submenus are available based on the Recording selection.
NOTE: When a USB device has more than one logical volume, each volume is
numbered. Use the right ADJUST knob to select from among the different volumes on
USB front, USB rear, and USB RCP storage devices.

ATTENTION:
• Disconnecting a USB device while recording to it may result in corrupt or lost data.
• Déconnecter un périphérique USB alors qu’un enregistrement y est effectué, peut
engendrer une altération ou une perte de données.

NOTE: The SMP 300 Series can detect and record to USB storage devices
using FAT32, VFAT long file name extensions, EXT2, EXT3, EXT4 file systems, or
NTFS‑formatted storage volumes. For FAT32 USB storage, file sizes must be limited
to 4 GB or the recording creates multiple 4 GB files. FAT32 internal recording does not
have the 4 GB size limit, if unlimited file size is selected.

Record To (Single)
The Record To submenu selects the drive the input is recorded to.
• Auto — The SMP stores the recording to locations in order of priority as set in the
Destination Recording Priority drop-down lists.
• Internal — Selects the internal drive and displays the available drive space.
• External — Selects the drive connected to the front panel USB port and displays the
available drive space. If there is no drive connected, the submenu is skipped.
When External is active, rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to select from the following:
• <USBFRONT [VOLNAME]> — An external drive connected to the front panel USB port.
• <USBREAR [VOLNAME]> — An external drive connected to the rear panel USB port.
• <USBRCP [VOLNAME]> — An external drive connected to the RCP USB port.
Auto mode allows users to set the recording storage priority by selecting options from the
four Destination Recording Priority drop-down lists (see figure 20 below). Recordings
are saved to the highest priority that has available storage space to the lowest (left to right).
When that drive is full, the SMP uses the next drive with available space in the priority list
(see Start an Ad Hoc Recording on page 61).

Figure 20. Recording Media Selection and Limit

For more information about recording media selection, please refer to the SMP 300 Series
Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 35

Record To (Internal + 2nd)
The Record To submenu selects the drive the input records to. Selecting Internal + 2nd
assumes there is a USB drive connected. The input is always recorded to both the internal
and external drives.
NOTE: In Dual Channel mode, Secondary Recording is disabled.

• Internal — Displays the available drive space for the internal drive.
• External — Displays the available drive space of the connected USB drive. If no drive
is currently connected, the drive space shows N/A.
When External is active, rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to select from the following:
• <USBFRONT [VOLNAME]> — An external drive connected to the front panel USB port.
• <USBREAR [VOLNAME]> — An external drive connected to the rear panel USB port.
• <USBRCP [VOLNAME]> — An external drive connected to the RCP USB port.

Streaming
Streaming is available in both archive and confidence encodes. Streaming can be ON
(enabled) or OFF. When streaming is enabled, the STREAM METHOD, STREAM PROTOCOL, and
MULTICAST IP or DESTINATION IP submenus are available (see figure 21). The appropriate
submenus are displayed depending on the previous submenu selection.
NOTE: In the menus and submenus, MULTI refers to a multicast protocol and UNI
refers to unicast.

RECORD/STREAM MENU
CONFIGURATION
NEXT

STREAMING
<ON>
Rotate either to
toggle streaming
on or off.
NEXT

STREAM METHOD STREAM METHOD

- OR -
<RTSP PULL> <PUSH>
Rotate either to
select RTSP PULL, RTP
PUSH, or RTMP PUSH.
NEXT NEXT

STREAM PROTOCOL STREAM PROTOCOL STREAM PROTOCOL Rotate either to select protocol
<UNICAST> -OR- <MULTICAST> <UNICAST> from this list:
UNI TS/UDP MULTI TS/UDP
Rotate either to select protocol. UNI TS/RTP MULTI TS/RTP
Press NEXT to select and move UNI ES/RTP MULTI ES/RTP
to next submenu.
Press NEXT to select and move
MULTICAST IP DESTINATION IP to next submenu.
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Rotate [ to select octet. Rotate [ to select octet.
Rotate { to change address. Rotate { to change address.
NEXT NEXT NEXT

Figure 21. Streaming Submenus

The following submenus appear only when the encoder selection is ARCHIVE. Confidence
encodes have independent stream settings.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 36

Stream Method
Rotate either ADJUST knob to select: PULL (default) or PUSH.

Stream Protocol
The available stream protocol follows push or pull streaming.
• When RTSP PULL streaming is selected, choose between UNI RTP/UDP (default) and
MULTI RTP/UDP.
• When RTP PUSH streaming is selected, choose one of six options: UNI TS/UDP (default),
UNI TS/RTP, UNI ES/RTP, MULTI TS/UDP, MULTI TS/RTP and MULTI ES/RTP.
• When RTMP PUSH streaming is selected, go to the web UI to enter the server URL and
stream name/key of the push destination
For more information, refer to the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

Multicast IP for pull multicast

When a multicast protocol is selected, the MULTICAST IP address must be entered. Check
with the IT department for the correct multicast IP address for your network.
Enter the MULTICAST IP address:
• Rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to select the octet.
• Rotate the right ({) ADJUST knob to change the address.

Destination IP for push streaming

When push streaming is selected, the DESTINATION IP address must be entered.
Enter the DESTINATION IP address:
• Rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to select the octet.
• Rotate the right ({) ADJUST knob to change the address.
NOTE: The destination can also be configured to a local hostname or
fully qualified domain name using the web-based user interface (see the
SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File for details).

Output mode
When the ARCHIVE encoder is selected, an option is provided to output audio and video or
video only.
Rotate either ADJUST knob to select an output mode (see figure 22 on the next page):
AUDIO/VIDEO or VIDEO.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 37

Audio Output
The SMP 351 without LinkLicense allows the user to set the AUDIO OUTPUT to either
A ONLY, B ONLY, or A+B.
The SMP 351 with LinkLicense and the SMP 352 allow users to set the AUDIO OUTPUT to
either channels A+B DUAL MONO or B DUAL MONO when Dual Mono for channel B is enabled.
RECORD/STREAM MENU
CONFIGURATION
NEXT

OUTPUT MODE
<AUDIO/VIDEO>
Rotate either to select audio
and video, or video only.
NEXT
AUDIO OUTPUT -OR- AUDIO OUTPUT
<B ONLY> <B DUAL MONO>
Rotate either to Rotate either to
select ChA, ChB or A+B. select B dual mono or A+B dual mono.
NEXT NEXT

Figure 22. Audio Output Submenu

Resolution
Archive and confidence encoders have independent resolution settings.
The selections are:
• Custom • 1280x720 (default)
• 512x288 • 1280x1024
• 848x480 • 1920x1080
• 1024x768

There are three types of encoders - Archive Channel A, Archive Channel B, and Confidence.

Output Rate Aspect Format Name Max FPS

1 848x480 16:9 480p 30
2 1280x720 16:9 720p 30
3 1920x1080 16:9 1080p 30
4 1024x768 4:3 XGA 30
5 1280x1024 5:4 SXGA 30
6 512x288 16:9 WCIF 30

Recording resolution defaults to 1280x720.

NOTES:
• If the archive and confidence aspect ratios do not match, the source material can
appear stretched on the confidence stream.
• A custom rate is defined with the web-based UI.
• For composite mode, the confidence encode cannot have a higher resolution than
the archive encode.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 38

 Frame Rate (video)
Archive and confidence encodes have independent frame rate settings. This menu provides
a frame rate selection (frames per second) from the following list:
• 30 (default) • 24 • 12.5 • 10
• 25 • 15 • 12 • 5

Frame rates are selected separately for the archive and confidence encoder configurations.

Bit Rate (Video)

Archive and confidence encodes have independent video bit rate settings. Video (VID) bit
rate sets a target video bit rate from 200 kbps to 10000 kbps (default 5000 kbps).
Rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to select the video bit rate.

Bit Rate (Audio)

Archive and confidence encodes have the same audio bit rate settings. Audio (AUD) bit rate
allows the user to select an audio bit rate in kbps from the following selections:
• 80 • 96 • 128
• 192 (default) • 256 • 320

Rotate the right ({) ADJUST knob to select an audio bit rate.

Input Configuration Menu

This menu allows the user to configure each of the five inputs.
NOTE: The Input Configuration submenus are input specific. Depending on the
input type, not all submenus (shown in gray on subsequent
NOTE:pages)
The Inputare available.
Configuration submenus are input
NOTE: specific.
The InputDepending
Configuration submenus
on the are not
input type, input
all
specific. Depending
submenus (shown in on
graythe
oninput type, notpages)
subsequent all
From the Input Config menu, press NEXT to enter the submenu are
(see
submenusimage below,
(shown
available. right).
in gray on subsequent pages)
are available.
Input Select INPUT MENU
INPUT MENU
CONFIG
The first submenu is the input selection (see image above CONFIG
NEXT
right). Rotate either ADJUST knob to select the desired input NEXT
number from the active front panel input selections for further INPUT SELECT
configuration. This selection determines the subsequent INPUT SELECT
<3>
<3>
submenus that are visible. Rotate either to
Rotateinput.
either to
select
select input.

Input Format INPUT #[3]

INPUT #[3]
<YUVp/HDTV>
The next submenu selects the input signal format (see image <YUVp/HDTV>
Rotate either to
at right). Rotatethe
select either
inputtoformat.
select the input format.

(3) H START V
(3) H START V
<128> <128>
<128> <128>
Rotate [ to select the horizontal
INPUT #1 INPUT #2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 **INPUT 5
Rotate
start [ to select the horizontal
pixel.
start pixel.
Rotate { to adjust the vertical
*HDMI/DVI *HDMI/DVI *YUVp/HDTV *HDMI/DVI *Auto-SDI
Rotate
start { to adjust the vertical
pixel.
start pixel.
(3) H ACTIVE V
YUVi (3) 3G-SDI
H ACTIVE
<1024> V
<0768>
<1024> <0768>
Rotate [ to adjust Horizontal Active pixel
Composite HD-SDI
Rotate [ to adjust Horizontal Active pixel
width.
width. { to adjust Vertical Active pixel height.
Rotate
SDI
Rotate { to adjust Vertical Active pixel height.

(3) TTLPIX PHASE

*Default (3) TTLPIX
<XXX>
PHASE
<16>
<XXX> <16>
**Input 5 is only available on the SDI models. Rotate [ to adjust TTL pixel width.
Rotate {[
Rotate toto adjust
adjust TTL pixel width.
phase.
Rotate { to adjust phase.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations

ASPECT RATIO IN[1] 39
ASPECT RATIO IN[1]
<FILL>
<FILL>
Rotate either to
Rotatean
select either to ratio for the
aspect
select an aspect ratio for the
 NOTE: When there is no active input, the input parameters show N/A. For digital inputs,
H/V start, H/V active, total pixel and phase submenus do not apply.

NOTE: The Input Configuration submenus are input

Film Detection (interlaced input formats only)
specific. Depending on the input type, not all
submenus (shown in gray on subsequent pages)
Film detection is automatically enabled when an interlaced input format is selected (see
are available.

Input Format on page 39 ). Film detection supports 2:2 and 3:2 detection.
INPUT The
MENU
processing maximizes image detail and sharpness for interlaced sources that originated
CONFIG
from film. Film detection is valid for any interlaced input type. The SMP
NEXT 300 Series

de‑interlaces NTSC, PAL, and 1080i inputs.

INPUT SELECT
If PIP mode and film detection are on for both inputs, the priority<3> is given to the interlace
input. If both inputs are interlaced, priority is first to the larger window size,
Rotate either
select input.
to or to the main

window.
Film detection mode cannot be disabled and has no user adjustments.
INPUT #[3]
<YUVp/HDTV>
Rotate either to
Signal Sampling Configuration select the input format.

Signal sampling optimizes the input signal for the

(3) H START V
currently selected input. The signal sampling settings <128> <128>
are only available for analog inputs. Rotate [ to select the horizontal
start pixel.
To use this submenu: Rotate { to adjust the vertical
start pixel.
• H Start (horizontal start) and V Start (vertical (3) H ACTIVE V
start) — This submenu is used to set the horizontal <1024> <0768>
and vertical start positions of the active video for Rotate [ to adjust Horizontal Active pixel
width.
input 3. Rotate { to adjust Vertical Active pixel height.

• Rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to change (3) TTLPIX PHASE
<XXX> <16>
the horizontal start pixel position (left edge)
Rotate [ to adjust TTL pixel width.
of the active video for the selected input. The Rotate { to adjust phase.
default is 128.
ASPECT RATIO IN[1]
• Rotate the right ({) ADJUST knob to change the vertical<FILL>
start line position (top edge)
of the active video for the selected input. The default is 128.
Rotate either to
select an aspect ratio for the
• H ACTIVE (horizontal active pixels) and V ACTIVE (vertical active lines)
selected input. — This submenu

is used to set the horizontal active pixels and vertical active lines#[1]of the active video for
EDID INPUT
input 3. <720p_60_2ch>
Rotate [ to set an
To use this submenu: EDID value for the
active input.
• Rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to change the width (in pixels) of the active video
IN[1] AUDIO SELECT
for the selected input. <LPCM 2CH>
Rotate either to
• Rotate the right ({) ADJUST knob to change the height (in lines)
select ofinput
an audio thesource
active video
for the selected input. for the selected input.

• TTLPIX (total pixels) and PHASE (pixel phase) — This submenu is used to set the total
IN[1] AUDIO LEVEL
<0 dB>
pixels and pixel phase of the active video for input 3. Rotate either to set the
audio input level from -18
To use this submenu: to +24 dB.

• Rotate the left ([) ADJUST knob to change the width (in pixels) of the total display
area to be sampled for the selected input.
• Rotate the right ({) ADJUST knob to move the pixel sampling point for the selected
input. The range of settings is 000 to 063. The default is 032.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 40

 <1024> <0768>
Rotate [ to adjust Horizontal Active pixel
width.
Rotate { to adjust Vertical Active pixel height.

(3) TTLPIX PHASE

<XXX> <16>
Rotate [ to adjust TTL pixel width.
Rotate { to adjust phase.
Aspect Ratio
The Aspect Ratio adjustment allows the user to select ASPECT RATIO IN[1]
between input rates to fill the entire window for that channel <FILL>

(FILL), scale up to fit the channel window and keep the Rotate either to
select an aspect ratio for the
original aspect ratio (FIT), or to allow each input rate to selected input.
display in its native aspect ratio with respect to the channel EDID INPUT #[1]
window (FOLLOW). <720p_60_2ch>
Rotate [ to set an
The aspect ratio can be changed per input. The selected input is displayed invalue
EDID theforfirst
the line.
active input.
Rotate either ADJUST knob to select FOLLOW, FILL (default), and FIT for the selected input.
IN[1] AUDIO SELECT
<LPCM 2CH>
Aspect Ratio Screen Appearance Description Rotate either to
select an audio input source
The input format passes unchanged. A 4x3
for the selected input.

format (represented byIN[1]theAUDIO

redLEVELblock on the
left) remains at its original aspect
<0 dB> ratio. The
FOLLOW vertical dimension fills, but not the horizontal
Rotate either to set the
audio input level from -18
dimension of theNOTE:
output
The or recording.
Inputto Configuration
+24 dB. Letter
submenus are input
specific. Depending on the input type, not all
box or pillar bars can be applied
submenus based
(shown in grayonon subsequent pages)
the horizontal and vertical size settings (see
are available.
Picture Control Menu on pageINPUT 30). MENU
CONFIG
The input format is zoomed to fill the
NEXT
output with top and bottom or left and right
information cropped out in order to fit the
INPUT SELECT
screen without letterboxing or adding
<3> pillars.
Some loss of image occurs represented
Rotate eitherby
to
FIT select input.
the dimmed image outside the red block.
INPUT #[3]
<YUVp/HDTV>
Rotate either to
select the input format.

(3) H START V
The input format is non-uniformly
<128>
scaled
<128>
to fill the 16x9 output. A 4x3 inputRotate
fills[the to select the horizontal
horizontal and vertical screen of the output
start pixel.
Rotate { to adjust the vertical
FILL or recording with some distortionstart
of pixel.
the input
(default) (3) H ACTIVE V
<1024> <0768>
Rotate [ to adjust Horizontal Active pixel
width.
Rotate { to adjust Vertical Active pixel heigh

NOTE: The selected input aspect ratio setting is applied to both the archive and (3) confidence
TTLPIX PHASE
<XXX> <16>
outputs. If the confidence resolution is different, the applied aspect ratio cannot be maintained.
Rotate [ to adjust TTL pixel width.
For example, if the archive resolution is 1080p with an aspect ratio of 16:9, and the confidence
Rotate { to adjust phase.
display is 1024x768 with an aspect ratio of 4:3, the input aspect ratio selection cannot be
maintained for both. ASPECT RATIO IN[1]
<FILL>
Rotate either to
EDID on HDMI Connectors select an aspect ratio for the
selected input.

EDID emulation is available on HDMI inputs 1, 2 and 4. By default, EDID INPUT #[1]
all three custom EDIDs are set to 720p @ 60 Hz, 2‑channel audio. <720p_60_2ch>
The selected input is displayed in the first line. Rotate either Rotate [ to set an
EDID value for the
ADJUST knob to select the desired EDID from the EDID table on active input.
page 42.
IN[1] AUDIO SELECT
<LPCM 2CH>
Rotate either to
select an audio input source
for the selected input.
SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 41
IN[1] AUDIO LEVEL
<0 dB>
Rotate either to set the
EDID Resolution Refresh Rate Rate Type Video Forma Audio
1 800x600 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
2 1024x768 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
3 1280x720 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
4 1280x768 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
5 1280x800 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
6 1280x1024 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
7 1360x768 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
8 1366x768 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
9 1400x1050 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
10 1440x900 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
11 1600x900 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
12 1600x1200 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
13 1680x1050 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
14 1920x1080 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
15 1920x1200 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
16 800x600 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
17 1024x768 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
18 1280x768 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
19 1280x800 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
20 1280x1024 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
21 1360x768 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
22 1366x768 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
23 1400x1050 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
24 1440x900 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
25 1600x900 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
26 1600x1200 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
27 1680x1050 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
28 1920x1200 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
29 480p 60 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
30 576p 50 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
31 720p 50 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
32 720p 60 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
33 1080i 50 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
34 1080i 60 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
35 1080p 25 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
36 1080p 50 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
37 1080p 24 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
38 1080p 60 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
39 User Loaded Slot 1
40 User Loaded Slot 2
41 User Loaded Slot 3

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 42

 start pixel.
<FILL>
(3) H ACTIVE V
Rotate either to
<1024> select<0768>
an aspect ratio for the
selected
Rotate [ input.
to adjust Horizontal Active pixel
width.
EDID INPUT #[1] adjust Vertical Active pixel height.
Rotate { to
<720p_60_2ch>
(3) TTLPIX PHASE
Rotate [ to set an
<XXX>EDID<16>
Audio Select value for the
active
Rotateinput.
[ to adjust TTL pixel width.
Rotate { to adjust phase.
Each of the inputs has a corresponding input audio format IN[1] AUDIO SELECT
selection. The selected input is displayed in the first line. <LPCM 2CH>
ASPECT RATIO IN[1]
Rotate either to
For HDMI inputs 1, 2, 4, and 5 the audio format can be: <FILL>
select an audio input source
for the selected
Rotate either to input.
• LPCM 2CH (default) — Embedded digital audio (default). select an aspect ratio for the
selected
IN[1] AUDIO LEVELinput.
• ANALOG AUDIO — Analog audio from the rear panel captive <0 dB>
EDID INPUT #[1]
screw connections. Rotate either to set the
<720p_60_2ch>
audio input level from -18
• OFF — No audio. to +24 dB.
Rotate [ to set an
EDID value for the
For analog video input 3, the audio format can be: active input.

• ANALOG AUDIO (default) — Analog audio from the rear IN[1] AUDIO SELECT
<LPCM 2CH>
panel captive screw connections.
Rotate either to
• OFF — No audio. select an audio input source
for the selected input.

Audio Level IN[1] AUDIO LEVEL

<0 dB>
Each audio input channel can be adjusted from -18 dB to
Rotate either to set the
+24 dB. The default value is 0 dB. The selected input is displayed audio input level from -18
in the first line. to +24 dB.

Background Recall Menu (For composite mode only) MENU BACKGROUND MENU
RECALL
A background can be selected to record with the channel A NEXT
and B inputs. Background files must be in PNG format and
uploaded to the Background folder of the SMP 300 Series RECALL
<default.png>
using the embedded web pages or an SFTP client. Rotate either to select.
Press NEXT to load
Use either knob to scroll through available files. Press NEXT the background file
to apply the background to the current layout. If the file is and exit.

smaller than the selected output resolution, the background MENU ADVANCED MENU
displays from the top left corner. If the file resolution is larger, CONFIG

the background is cropped to fit the selected resolution. NEXT

Advanced Configuration Menu IN<1> AUTO IMAGE

<OFF>

The following flowchart provides an overview of the Rotate [ to select input.

Rotate { to toggle on or off.

ADVANCED CONFIGURATION menu. Options include NEXT

AUTO IMAGE (ON or OFF), PREVIEW HDMI OUT, AUTO MEMORY PREVIEW HDMI OUT
<1280X720@60Hz>
(ON or OFF), TEST PATTERN, RECORD DRIVE LIMITER, and Rotate either to select
RESET (defaults to factory). a resolution.

NEXT
AUTO MEMORY
Auto-Image <ON>
Rotate { to toggle Auto
This mode is selectable per input and is used where a Memory On or Off.

variety of input sources are likely encountered. Auto-Image NEXT

TEST PATTERN
automatically sizes and positions incoming video signal to <N/A>
fill the channel window when a new input signal is detected. Rotate either to select a
test pattern.
When Auto Memory is off, Auto-Image executes whether or NEXT
not the same input frequency has been detected before. RECORD DRIVE LIMITER
<OFF/ON>
NOTE: Enabling Auto-Image when overscan is also Rotate either to select
enabled recalls the default sampling settings for the the drive restriction.

NEXT
detected input rate.
RESET
<NONE>
Rotate either to select
reboot or to reset all
advanced configurations.
NEXT

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 43

Use the left ([) ADJUST knob to select the desired input. Us the right ({) ADJUST knob to
toggle AUTO IMAGE ON or OFF (default).
When enabled and a new input frequency is detected, an existing Auto Memory for the
signal is applied (if AUTO MEMORY is enabled). If no entry exists, an automatic Auto‑Image
is applied to the new signal. This sizes and positions the incoming video signal to display
properly within the channel window, with respect to the current aspect ratio setting.
The value is global to all analog inputs on the SMP 300 Series and defines the minimum
luminosity that the Auto‑Image routine defines as active video (default: 25%).
Auto-Image affects active pixel, active lines, H/V start, and phase configurations. All other
picture controls remain unchanged. If the aspect ratio is set to FILL, H/V position returns
to 0, 0 and the H/V size is set to match the current output rate. Input sampling settings are
updated according to standard Auto‑Image operation. If the aspect ratio is set to Follow or
Fit, the H/V position and H/V size are set to maintain the native aspect ratio of the input in
respect to the current output resolution. All input sampling settings are updated according
to standard Auto‑Image operation. Image size and position are reset to default values after
auto imaging.
MENU ADVANCED MENU
Press NEXT to select the input value and move to the next submenu.
CONFIG
NOTE: Aside from the standard Auto‑Image SIS command, there are unique
NEXT
commands to Auto‑Image to fill the output and maintain input aspect ratio (see
Auto‑Image and Memory on page 122). IN<1> AUTO IMAGE
<OFF>
Rotate [ to select input.
Preview HDMI Output Rotate { to toggle on or off.

Use either front panel ADJUST knobs to select the refresh rate MENU NEXT
ADVANCED MENU
of the Preview HDMI Output. It can be either 50 Hz or 60 Hz CONFIG
PREVIEW HDMI OUT
(default). The resolution follows the archive output and cannot be <1280X720@60Hz>
NEXT
changed. Rotate either to select
a resolution.
IN<1> AUTO IMAGE
Press NEXT to select the value and move to the next submenu. <OFF>NEXT
Rotate [ to select input.
AUTO MEMORY
NOTE: When the selected archive resolution is under 720 lines (for example, if {the
Rotate
<ON> to toggle on or off.
archive encoder is set as 848x480 or 512x288) the HDMI preview outputNEXT
is set{ tototoggle Auto
Rotate
1280x720, with the video content centered in the 720p window. PREVIEW HDMI
Memory On or Off.
OUT
<1280X720@60Hz>
NEXT
Rotate either to select
Auto Memory TEST PATTERN
a resolution.
<N/A>
AUTO MEMORY is enabled on all inputs by default. It should only NEXT
Rotate either to select a
test pattern.
be disabled if the user desires to have a source applied to the AUTO MEMORY
<ON>NEXT
input treated as a new source regardless of whether the source
Rotate { to toggle Auto
was detected previously. RECORD DRIVE LIMITER
Memory On or Off.
<OFF/ON>
When enabled and a new input frequency is detected, an NEXT
Rotate either to select
existing Auto Memory for the signal is first applied. the drive restriction.
TEST PATTERN
<N/A>NEXT
If no entry exists, it performs an automatic Auto-Image on the new signal. This sets a size
Rotate either to select a
RESET
and position for the image to fill the screen, with respect to the current aspect ratio
test
<NONE> setting.
pattern.

The SMP 300 Series has 16 global memory locations, and stores unique entries NEXT foreither
Rotate each to select
reboot or to reset all
input format (for example, YUVi versus YUV-HD). Auto Memory savesRECORD H/V DRIVE
start, active
LIMITER
advanced configurations.
<OFF/ON>
pixels, active lines, total pixels, phase, brightness, contrast, color, and tint settings.
NEXT
Rotate either to select
The input lookup table identifies new analog inputs based on input type, totalthe
line count
drive restriction.

of the input, and H/V frequency. Auto Memory locations associate with specific NEXTentries
in the input lookup table (not based solely on H/V frequency). For example,RESET
the RGBHV
<NONE>
1024x768 @ 60 Hz input lookup table entry can only have a single associated Auto Memory.
Rotate either to select
reboot or to reset all
advanced configurations.
NEXT

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 44

 MENU ADVANCED MENU
CONFIG

NEXT
IN<1> AUTO IMAGE
<OFF>
Rotate [ to select input.
Rotate { to toggle on or off.
Digital inputs are automatically set up using information regarding image size and refresh
NEXT
provided by the digital input. This allows for non-standard rates (not found in the input
PREVIEW HDMI OUT
lookup table) to display correctly. Digital inputs that do not match an existing lookup table
<1280X720@60Hz>
are saved to Auto Memory as unique entries based on the total line count, H/V active,
Rotate either toand
select
vertical refresh rate. a resolution.

NEXT
Press NEXT to select the value and move to the next submenu. AUTO MEMORY
<ON>

Test Patterns Rotate { to toggle Auto

Memory On or Off.

Test patterns are an essential tool for configuration and NEXT

troubleshooting. TEST PATTERN
<N/A>
The SMP 300 Series offers eight patterns, applied per window: Rotate either to select a
color bars, time stamp, pulse (for audio), crop aspect ratio (1.33, test pattern.

1.78, 1.85), and universal OSD patterns. NEXT

RECORD DRIVE LIMITER
Color Bars Aspect Ratio 1.33:1 Aspect Ratio 1.78:1 <OFF/ON>
Aspect Ratio 1.85:1
Rotate either to select
the drive restriction.

NEXT
RESET
<NONE>

Crop Pulse Time Stamp Rotate either to select

Universal OSD reboot or to reset all
)UL $SU   advanced configurations.
NEXT

Figure 23. Test Patterns

• Color Bars — Standard full screen color bars overlaid on top of the current layout.
• Time Stamp (For composite mode only) – Displays white text in a small, translucent,
gray rectangle with the unit date and time (for example: Fri Apr 18 HH:MM:SS) in the
top left corner of the display window.
• Pulse — Select Pulse to output an audio pulse of 400 Hz at -10 dBu for audio output
testing.
• Crop — Outlines the active picture area.
• Aspect Ratio — Three patterns with screen outlines in 1.33:1, 1.78:1, and 1.85:1 for
centering and size adjustment.
• Universal OSD (For composite mode only) — This pattern consists of a small,
translucent, gray rectangle with white text overlaid atop the source video content.
It appears in the upper left of the screen. The text includes brief text of your choice
followed by three selectable elements separated by commas (see Setting up the
universal OSD test pattern on page 78).
Rotate either ADJUST knob to scroll through the patterns. Stop on the desired pattern
and press NEXT. The selected test pattern is immediately output to the display. The test
pattern displays until another pattern is selected, OFF is selected from the Test Pattern
drop‑down list, or unit power is recycled.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 45

 AUTO MEMORY
<ON>
NEXT
Rotate { to toggle Auto
PREVIEW HDMIMemory
OUT On or Off.
<1280X720@60Hz>
NEXT
Rotate either to select
a resolution.
TEST PATTERN
<N/A>
NEXT
Rotate either to select a
Record Drive Limiter AUTO MEMORY
<ON>
test pattern.

Configure the record drive locations to be limited or to be fully NEXT

Rotate { to toggle Auto
automatic. The following limitations can be selected: Memory On or Off.
RECORD DRIVE LIMITER
<OFF/ON>
• OFF (not restricted, default) — Record to internal memory NEXT
Rotate either to select
and any connected drives. TEST PATTERN
<N/A> the drive restriction.
• ON NEXT
Rotate either to select a
test pattern.
Based on the top level selection, the REC LOCATION submenu under Record/Stream
RESET
<NONE>
NEXT
Config offers different record drive options (see Record and Stream Configuration
Rotate either to select
Menu on page 33). RECORD DRIVE LIMITER
reboot or to reset all
<OFF/ON> advanced configurations.
Rotate
NEXT either to select
Reset the drive restriction.

The Reset submenu provides a factory reset or firmware NEXT

reboot. The selections are: RESET
<NONE>
• To Factory — Equivalent to a ZQQQ command (see
Rotate either to select
Resets on page 116). The unit is reset to factory defaults reboot or to reset all
with the current firmware. advanced configurations.
NEXT
• Reboot Unit — Identical to a power cycle.
A reset or reboot confirmation message appears before the reset or reboot. After confirming,
the front panel LCD displays Resetting/Rebooting Unit.
NOTE: The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have been set
to the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the passwords
convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and Roles on page 86 to
change a password).

Comm Settings (View and Edit) Menu

The two Comm Settings menus provide a status of the VIEW COMM Press and hold
INPUT 5 + NEXT
current serial port and IP settings for the communications SETTINGS for 3 seconds.

ports. A hidden menu allows changes to the settings.

The main menu defaults to the VIEW COMM SETTINGS “Hidden” Menu*

submenus for viewing all communication port settings. EDIT COMM

SETTINGS
Press NEXT to cycle through the submenu.
The VIEW COMM SETTINGS submenu is read‑only. To NEXT
SERIAL PORT
make changes, press and hold NEXT and INPUT 5 9600 RS232
simultaneously for 3 seconds in the VIEW COMM SETTINGS Rotate either to change
the baud rate.
menu or any of the submenus. The VIEW COMM SETTINGS NEXT
menu changes to the EDIT COMM SETTINGS menu. MAC ADRESS
005A6078CEC
This is set at the factory and cannot be
changed. (Skipped in “Edit” mode.)
NEXT
DHCP MODE
<OFF> On
Rotate either to toggle
DHCP mode On or Off.
NEXT
IP ADDR
192.168.254.254
Rotate [ to select octet field.
Rotate { to change address.
NEXT
SUBNET
255.255.000.000
Rotate either to change mask.

NEXT
GATEWAY
000.000.000.000
Rotate [ to select octet field.
Rotate { to change address.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 46

Change an Address
To change the IP address (IP ADDR), Subnet Mask (SUBNET),
and Gateway IP address (GATEWAY): 1 IP XXX.XXX 5 IP
XXX.XXX
Enter the EDIT COMM SETTINGS menu and navigate to the
desired address (IP address shown). Rotate [ to select octet.

1. Make the octet selection with the left ([) ADJUST 2 6

IP 192.XXX IP
knob. The selected octet blinks (shown in Bold in the XXX.XXX
illustration at right, 1).
Rotate { to change address.
2. Change the selected octet value using the right ({)
ADJUST knob (2). 3 IP 192.XXX 7 IP
XXX.XXX
3. Make the next octet selection with the left ([) ADJUST
knob. The selected octet blinks (shown in Bold in the Rotate [ to select octet.
illustration at right, 3).
4 8
4. Change the selected octet value using the right ({) IP 192.168
XXX.XXX
IP

ADJUST knob (4).

Rotate { to change address.
5. Make the next octet selection with the left ([) ADJUST
knob. The selected octet blinks (shown in Bold in the
illustration at right, 5). 1 IP XXX.XXX 5 IP 192.168
XXX.XXX XXX.XXX
6. Change the selected octet value using the right ({)
ADJUST knob (6). Rotate [ to select octet. Rotate [ to select octet.

2 the
7. Make the next octet selection with ([) ADJUST
IP left192.XXX 6 IP 192.168
Bold in the
knob. The selected octet blinks, shown inXXX.XXX 254.XXX
illustration at right (7).
Rotate { to change address. Rotate { to change address.

8. Change the selected octet value using the right ({)

ADJUST knob (8). 3 IP 192.XXX 7 IP 192.168
XXX.XXX 254.XXX
When you are done with the changes, press MENU to cancel
the changes and return to the EDIT COMM SETTINGS menu
Rotate [ to select octet. Rotate [ to select octet.

or NEXT to submit the value. The network connection

restarts to reflect the changes after 4
pressing
IP NEXT
192.168 from the 8 IP 192.168
GATEWAY submenu. XXX.XXX 254.254

NOTE: The subnet mask is changed using either

Rotate { to change address. Rotate { to change address.

ADJUST knob.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 47

Status Menu
The STATUS menu contains read-only MENU MENU EXIT MENU?
STATUS
submenus that show the current unit status PRESS NEXT
including active alarms, recording file names, NEXT

free space and total internal and external

ALARM STATUS
drive capacity, and bit rates for archive and [NONE, HDCP, VIDEO...]
confidence streams. NEXT

• ALARM STATUS — Scroll through the active

ARCHIVE
alarms. If no alarms are present, it shows [...FILENAME...]
None. NEXT

• ARCHIVE — Displays filenames currently DRIVE SPACE INT

being written to or the last file created. [FREE/TOTAL][GB]

If the filename is longer than sixteen NEXT

characters, the filename scrolls. It shows

N/A if no new or current recordings are SELECTED USBFRONT
[FREE/TOTAL] [GB]
(Could say USBREAR if
selected in web pages)
present. NEXT

NOTE: A non-ASCII character in a

SELECTED VOLNAME
filename is displayed as a white block. [FREE/TOTAL][GB]
NEXT
• DRIVE SPACE — Indicates the free and total
space on the internal hard drive and the [ARCH]
CHA BRBR5000
5000kpbs
kbps
MULTIRTP/UDP
MULTI TS/RTP
selected USB drive. The capacity is shown NEXT
in three digits with two decimals in either
MB or GB. CONFBRBR5000
CHA 350 kbps
kpbs
UNI RTP/UDP
MULTI RTP/UDP
• SELECTED VOLUME NAME — Displays the NEXT

size and free space on a connected USB

drive.
• OUTPUT STREAM — Displays the video bit rate and protocol of the output stream.
Press NEXT to return to the STATUS menu.

Exit Menu
From this submenu, press MENU to return to the PRESETS menu cycle, or press NEXT to exit
the menu and return to the default cycle.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 48

Front Panel Lockout (Executive Modes)
To prevent accidental changes to front panel menu settings, simultaneously press MENU and
MARK for 3 seconds to enable front panel lockout mode.
The menu system returns to the default menu within 10 seconds.
Executive mode begins in mode 1. Rotate either ADJUST knob to cycle to mode 2, then
mode 3, and mode 4 (Executive mode off).
When executive mode is active, all functions and adjustments can still be made via USB,
RS-232, or Ethernet control (see Remote Communication and Control starting on
page 106).
Executive mode OFF
DEFAULT
CYCLE
Press MENU + MARK
for 3 seconds.
SELECT EXE MODE SELECT EXE MODE SELECT EXE MODE SELECT EXE MODE
<COMPLETE LOCK> <MENU LOCKOUT> <RECORD CTRL ONLY> <OFF>
Rotate either to NEXT to enter NEXT to enter NEXT to enter NEXT to turn Executive
select from the Executive mode 1. Executive mode 2. Executive mode 3. mode off and exit.
four modes.

MODE 1: COMPLETE LOCK MODE 2: MENU LOCKOUT MODE 3: RECORD CTRL ONLY MODE 4: OFF
All front panel controls disabled. No access to the front panel Record, Pause, Stop, and Mark Executive mode is disabled
menus. Selection buttons are buttons are available. (default).
active.

Figure 24. Front Panel Lockout (Executive Mode)

When executive mode is enabled, simultaneously press MENU and MARK to display the
SELECT EXE MODE submenu. The current executive mode status is listed in this submenu.
In addition, when executive mode is enabled, the front panel buttons change color
corresponding to the active executive mode (see the following table).

Executive Executive Mode Active Input Layout Menu/Next

Mode Description Buttons Preset/Swap
1 Complete lock Amber Off Off
2 Menu lockout Amber Amber On
3 Record ctrl only Amber Off Off
Off OFF (no lockout) Amber Amber Amber

NOTE: Control buttons indicate the current recording or streaming status regardless of
executive mode.

Alarms
The front panel alarms display lists alerts for events as determined in the web page (see
Alarms and Traps on page 88). The Alarm table on page 50 lists alarms generated
by the SMP 300 Series, what they mean, and how they are cleared.
NOTE: All active alarms can be manually cleared by an administrator via the web page
(see Alarms on page 100).

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 49

 Alarm Alarm Generated Alarm Cleared
App Failure • A drop in communication between firmware Reinstall the FlexOS app.
and enabled FlexOS app.
• It is a Notify alarm by default.
Audio Loss One of these occur during a recording: • The audio signal is maintained above
• Audio is absent (signal is at or below -60 dBFS for a contiguous period of
-60 dBFS) before a recording starts, an alarm 60 seconds.
triggers after 5 minutes of the start of the • The recording session ends.
recording.
• Audio is lost during a recording, the alarm
triggers after 10 seconds.
Auth Failures Any combination of access interfaces (web page, Can only be cleared by an administrator via
Telnet, API, SFPT, SIS via SSH) that require the web page (see Alarms and Traps on
authentication, with a maximum of 20 failed login page 88) or SIS commands (see Clear active
attempts within 20 seconds on any combination alarms on page 116).
of user IDs (including non-existent user IDs).
Disk Error • Internal system storage volume registers one • Replace the affected USB storage.
or more read or write errors that cannot be • Choose a different target storage volume.
recovered. • Remove the write protection from the volume.
• A read or write error is detected on the
selected storage volume (for example: a write
protected drive).
• Target storage volume is not found (for
example: USBFront is selected but the SMP
does not detect any external storage).
Disk Space • The external USB storage volume drops to • Replace the affected storage with one having
<10 minutes of recording time while recording. adequate space (USB drive).
• The target volume does not have sufficient • Choose an alternate target storage volume
space to record at the start of an event. with adequate space.
Firmware Failure • A failure to start a critical portion of SMP Contact Extron Support when this alarm is
operation. triggered.
• It is a Notify alarm by default.
HDCP Video The signal is HDCP protected and the SMP The HDCP source is no longer active or is taken
cannot negotiate HDCP for any reason on an off the input.
active input.
NTP Sync • The SMP attempts to automatically sync The NTP sync succeeds without retries for a
with the configured NTP server and fails the period of five synchronization attempts.
primary and retry attempts.
• SMP fails multiple manual sync attempts.
Publish Failure A file transfer method is configured but the unit Can only be cleared by an Administrator via
fails to upload files after 5 sequential retries. the web page (see Alarms and Traps) or SIS
command (see Clear active alarms).
Record Halt A recording is terminated without a command to Can only be cleared by an Administrator via the
stop. web page (see Alarms and Traps).
Sched Server There is an error communicating with the The connection to the server is restored or an
scheduling server. alternate scheduling configuration is set.
Temperature Internal The SMP internal temperature exceeds 60° C for The SMP temperature drops below 50° C.
2 minutes.
USB Overcurrent A USB port current draw exceeds the 1.5 A limit The offending device is removed from the SMP.
(front and rear USB) of the ports.
USB Overcurrent A USB port current draw of a connected mouse The offending device is removed from the SMP.
(keyboard and mouse) or keyboard exceeds the 0.5 A limit of the ports.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 50

 Alarm Alarm Generated Alarm Cleared
Video Loss • Video sync is lost during a recording for a Video sync is detected for about 2 seconds.
period of 0.5 seconds that is not the result of
an input change.
• The input is changed and video sync cannot
be established within a 2 seconds limit.
Virtual Input • V1 or V2 is selected but the connection • A new stream URI is entered.
cannot be established (fail to load). • Successfully reconnect the stream.
• V1 or V2 is selected but the unit detects • Manually cleared by the Admin.
stream errors (cannot connect to stream).

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 51

Web-Based User
Interface
This section provides information about:
• Overview of the Web-Based User Interface • Scheduled Events
• Accessing the Web-Based User Interface • Configuration
• Logging Out and Logging In • File Management
• AV Controls Panel • Troubleshooting
• Recording Controls • Mirroring LinkLicense

Overview of the Web-Based User Interface

The SMP 300 Series embedded web pages provide the software user interface for
operating and configuring the SMP via a PC on the same network.
NOTE: In figure 25, the home page for a standard SMP 300 Series device is shown.
If the Horizontal Video Mirroring LinkLicense is purchased, there will be an additional
Mirroring LinkLicense tab and Horizontal Video Mirroring Status section.

Figure 25. SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages

These web pages provide the following features:
• Configure the SMP.
• Import a schedule, integrate schedules from a scheduling system, or create ad hoc
recordings.
• Update firmware.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 52

 • Configure automatic uploads (publishing) of completed recordings to a designated
server or video publishing system.
• Remote control and active monitoring of the SMP.
• View the AV content that is being recorded and streamed in a small embedded video
window.
• Access to upload background files to and download or transfer presentation recordings
from the SMP.
• Display alarm history and allow administrators to clear active alarms.
• Upload and install a LinkLicense on an SMP 351 or SMP 351 3G-SDI (see Extron
LinkLicense on page 3).
Web Browser Requirements
In order to view the SMP 300 Series embedded web pages, use one of the supported web
browsers (see PC Requirements on page 3).
NOTE: The preview video in the AV Controls panel of the SMP uses an HTML5 player
and is not supported by Microsoft Internet Explorer v.11, Microsoft Edge, or Apple
Safari. To see a preview of the current stream you can either:
Use a different browser, or
Open a standalone, third-party video player (such as VideoLAN™ open source VLC™
media player) and connect to the confidence stream from the SMP.
Web-Based User Interface Help Files
The SMP 300 Series web-based user interface contains an extensive set of help files to
assist with the connection, configuration, monitoring, and operation of the SMP 300 Series.
The following sections contain an overview of those files and also include information not
contained in the help files.

Accessing the Web-Based User Interface

To access the embedded web page user interface:
1. Connect a control PC to the LAN port of the SMP 300 Series, or to the same network
shared by the SMP.
2. Open a web browser.
3. Enter the IP address of the SMP 300 Series into the browser address field (the default
IP address is 192.168.254.254).
4. Enter the username and password to log in.
NOTE: The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have
been set to the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the
passwords convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and Roles
on page 86 to change a password).

5. Click Log In or OK.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 53

The main user interface opens to the Recording Controls page (see figure 26).

Figure 26. SMP 300 Series Main User Interface

NOTE: In figure 26, the home page for a standard SMP 300 Series device is shown.
If the Horizontal Video Mirroring LinkLicense is purchased, there will be an additional
Mirroring LinkLicense tab and Horizontal Video Mirroring Status section
displaying the status of the horizontal mirroring of each input.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 54

Page Overview
The SMP 300 Series pages are organized by function and further organized within those
main functions. Click the tabs to open the pages.

Tabs
The pages in the SMP 300 Series are grouped within five main tabs at the top of the page:

Figure 27. Five Main Function Tabs

1 Recording Controls (see page 64) — This single page provides a view of the status
of currently selected inputs and outputs, along with details of the active recording and
stream (the current event), and a table-style list of upcoming scheduled events. The
URLs of the streams are also displayed on this page.
2 Scheduled Events (see page 66) — This tab features three pages that provide a
calendar view of previous and upcoming recording events, as well as scheduling and
publishing configuration options.
3 Configuration (see page 72) — The eight pages within this tab contain the
core controls typically needed during initial setup, upgrading the unit, or restoring a
configuration. These pages make it possible for an administrator to configure basic AV
input settings:
• Output video test patterns for setup.
• Configure output stream settings and presets.
• Set up AV encoding and presets.
• Select or configure layouts and layout presets.
• Set passwords.
• Set up notices and alarms.
• Select preview window settings.
The Configuration pages also provide the means to configure basic communication,
identity, time, data storage, and recording location settings, along with making it
possible to update firmware or restore a configuration from a saved file.
4 File Management (see page 95) — This page provides the means to view
folders and files on the internal drive and any attached external drive, and to upload
background image files to the unit. It also provides the means to connect the SMP to
shared network drives.
5 Troubleshooting (see page 97) — The five pages within this tab display factory-
defined and user-defined information about the unit and the encoded streams, display
a log of events and a log of alarms and their status, provide two simple diagnostic tools
for checking network connections, and provide the means to perform a variety of types
of resets on the SMP.
6 Mirroring LinkLicense (see page 103)— If the unit has been upgraded with the
Horizontal Video Mirroring LinkLicense, there will be a sixth tab with two panels.
This page allows the user to enable horizontal video mirroring on each input, adjust
the minimum available recording time available on a storage device, and set a start
recording delay.
NOTE: Users logged in as administrators can access all the embedded web pages and
subpages. User logged in as users can access only the Recording Controls page
and the AV Controls panel.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 55

Pages Within Tabs
The Scheduled Events, Configuration, and Troubleshooting tabs each include
several pages. To access each page, click the corresponding function within the
second tier of tabs (sub-tabs) located below the main tabs near the top of the page (see
Configuration > Input/Output Settings shown selected in figure 28).

Figure 28. Pages Within Tabs — Sub-tabs

Panels and Sections

Each SMP 300 Series web page contains at least one panel and a main window with
sections that group the controls and information for each page. Most panels include
controls and a variety of adjustments and settings. Specific sections can include controls
or simply display information. Sections or panels can include tabs with additional selections
and options.
All SMP 300 Series web pages include the AV Controls panel at the left of the page (see
AV Controls Panel on page 58). The Recording Controls page is the main page and
also serves as the main operating interface. It contains one panel and three sections. Pages
such as the Systems Settings page within the Configuration tab include several panes,
each with a different collection of information and settings.

Collapse and expand panes

Click the Expand (see figure 29, 1) arrow button on the right side of a pane. The pane
opens to a full view, or as much as possible with the current display settings.
Click the Collapse (2) arrow button at the top corner of a pane to collapse it. This hides
the controls and provides additional room for other panes.

Figure 29. Collapsed and Expanded Panes

NOTE: For some pages, the last-selected view is maintained. If you navigate away from
one page to a different tab or page, and then return, the page appears as it did before
leaving the page. Panes automatically collapse each time you leave and return.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 56

 Web Page Idle (Timeout)
To conserve resources (memory, bandwidth) on the PC, if the web browser is idle for more
than about an hour, the SMP 300 Series web page enters idle mode. During idle mode,
status updates and video confidence (preview) display image updates are suspended, and
the following message is displayed in front of the page:
Idle

Communication with the device is being temporarily suspended to conserve

resources.
Please press “Resume” to continue.

Resume

Figure 30. Communication Suspended Notification Dialog

NOTE: The idle status does not affect the recording or the output AV streams, which
continue unaffected, no matter what state (active or idle) the web pages are in.
To reconnect the web page to the live feed from the SMP 300 Series, click Resume. In a
moment, the browser refreshes the view, the status updates, and video confidence display
resume.
NOTE: If the SMP 300 Series loses the network connection, the connection to the
embedded web pages is also lost. You may receive notice of the connection failure,
but there is no specific status indication for disconnection.

Logging Out and Logging In

Before changing roles (from administrator to user, or user to administrator) or changing
user accounts, log out of the embedded web pages. The user or administrator status is
displayed in the upper right corner of all web pages.
The Logout button shows only if one or more passwords is active.
NOTE: The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have been set
to the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the passwords
convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and Roles on page 86 to
change a password).
To log out of the web pages:
1. From any embedded web page, click the Logout button at the upper right of the
browser page.
A Logout dialog box opens.
2. Click OK to log out of the SMP 300 Series web pages, or click Cancel to remain logged
on using the same account.
The Logout dialog closes and returns you to the embedded web pages.
NOTE:
• If you click Cancel, you remain logged in and the embedded web pages
continue to function as they did before you clicked Logout.
• If you click OK, the controls are replaced by a message confirming that you are
logged out and asking you to close the browser. Close the browser completely.
If you close only a tab within the browser, the logout process does not
complete.
• Some browsers, such as Google Chrome, include an option to continue
running in the background after closing. If this is enabled on Windows, the
browser can be exited completely using the taskbar notification icon.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 57

 To log in to an SMP 300 Series:
1. Open a web browser.
2. Enter the IP address of the SMP into the address field and navigate to that unit. The
Authentication Required (Chrome or Firefox) or Windows Security (Microsoft
Edge) login dialog box opens.
3. Enter the appropriate user or administrator user name and corresponding password
into the fields.
NOTE: The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have
been set to the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the
passwords convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and Roles
on page 86 to change a password).
4. Click Log In or OK. The embedded web page opens.

AV Controls Panel
The AV Controls panel is available on every page and within all tab views. Located along
the left side of the pages, this panel makes it possible to easily control a recording, see a
thumbnail view of the recorded and output video, swap video content between windows,
select different inputs, and mute or unmute the AV output. The browser always opens with
the AV Controls panel expanded and both presenters and administrators have access.
AV Controls Panel Features
The AV Controls panel includes the following features:
Preview
This area (see 1, at right) provides a small, live stream 2 3
view of the output video. It is delayed about 5 seconds
compared to the recording and output stream. 1 4
The live preview stream is independent of the streaming
settings configured in the Encoding Presets pane (see
Encoding & Layout on page 81). 5
NOTE: The preview video in the AV Controls panel
of the SMP uses an HTML5 player and is not
supported by Microsoft Edge or Apple Safari. To
see a preview of the current stream either:
Use a different browser or
Open a standalone, third-party video player (such
as VideoLAN opensource VLC media player) and
connect to the stream from the SMP.

• Disabling the preview window — To make the

embedded web pages faster to refresh, the live
preview can be disabled. The recording and output
streams continue to be streamed when this preview
is disabled. To disable the live feed to this preview,
clear (uncheck) the Enable Preview checkbox (2)
above the preview window.
To display the preview again, select (check) the
Enable Preview checkbox. The confidence stream
for the preview can also be disabled using front panel
controls (see Front Panel Menu Operation on
page 26).

Figure 31. AV Controls Panel

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 58

• Separate preview window — To open the live preview in a separate, larger window,
click the Launch Preview button (see figure 31, 3 on page 58) in the upper right
corner of the AV Controls panel. When the separate live preview window opens,
preview audio is enabled and the preview window within the panel is disabled. If you
close the separate live preview window, select (check) the Enable Preview checkbox
(2) again to display the preview stream within the panel.
• Full screen preview — To display the preview in full screen view, double-click the
preview image in the AV Controls panel. To exit full screen view, press the keyboard
<Esc> key.

Swap (For composite mode only)

Click the Swap button (4) to make video from channel A trade window locations with video
from channel B.
NOTE: The Swap button in the AV Controls panel is disabled when the SMP is in
dual channel encoding mode. The Swap button on the front panel is disabled during
recording when the SMP is in dual channel encoding mode.

Preview mute
By default, the audio portion of the preview is muted,
which does not affect audio to the recording and web
streams. To listen to the audio that accompanies the
preview, click the preview audio Mute button (5) to Figure 32. Mute Button
change from muted (default) to unmuted (see figure 32):

Recording controls
Recording control buttons function the way
controls do on a DVR or other recording
device. Buttons include (see figure 33):
• Record — Set up an ad hoc* recording
Figure 33. Recording Control Buttons
session and start or resume recording.

• Pause — Pause recording.

• Extend — Extend the duration of a recording event by ten minutes beyond the
scheduled end time.
NOTE: The Extend Recording button only applies to scheduled recordings.
• Stop — Stop recording and end the recording session.
*An ad hoc recording session is one that has been set up for a specific occasion without
being scheduled. Ad hoc recordings can last up to eight hours.
Text above the buttons lists the status of the recording: recording, paused, or stopped. A
button is blue when selected (active or on) and gray when deselected (inactive or off).
• Mark — This button works like the Mark button on the front panel of the SMP. It is
grayed out and inaccessible when the unit is not recording, and becomes accessible
and clickable once a recording starts. When you click this button during a recording,
you create a time-referenced chapter marker to make it easy to find content at that
point in the recording during playback. When you click the button, the button becomes
unavailable (grays out). The button reactivates after a brief delay (about five seconds)
while unit stores the marker information.
NOTE: The front panel buttons also indicate the recording state, mirroring the
AV Control panel indicators (see Front Panel Features on page 21).

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 59

 3

Progress bar
A progress bar (see figure 34, 1) below the
recording control buttons is a horizontal bar graph
1
that shows how much recording time has elapsed
and, if it is a scheduled session rather than an 2
ad hoc recording, how long the presentation is
expected to last. For an ad hoc recording, initially Figure 34. Progress Bar and
the progress bar shows a five minute duration. Recording Time
The displayed duration increases in five-minute Available
increments as the ad hoc recording progresses.
1
Recording time available
2
Recording time remaining (2) is indicated below the progress bar in the format HHH:MM:SS.
The estimate of how much time remains available is based on the combination of available
storage space and the current stream resolution and bit rate. During a scheduled recording,
this field indicates how much time remains in the event. During an ad hoc recording,3
the
calculated time is displayed.
If dual recording mode is enabled, the remaining time is listed first for the internal storage
drive and then for the selected secondary (external USB) drive (132:46:27*00:03:44, for
example).

Input selection, mute controls, audio indication, and auto-image

Inputs are grouped into two channels:
• Channel A (see figure 35, 1) — Composed 1 4
of input 1 (HDMI) and input 2 (HDMI).
• Channel B (2) — Composed of input 3 2 5
(component/composite), input 4 (HDMI),
and optional input 5 (3G/HD/SDI) for the
SMP 351 3G-SDI and SMP 352 3G-SDI.
There is one analog audio input per channel. HDMI 3
inputs can be configured for digital audio (embedded
in HDMI) or a shared analog input for the channel. Figure 35. Active Inputs,
The audio type for each input is displayed in the right Mute, Audio, and
column (4). Auto‑image
Audio format (Off, Digital Stereo or Analog Stereo) must be configured in the Input/
Output Settings page (see Input/Output Settings on page 74).
To select AV sources:
1. Click the input buttons (see figure 35, 1 and 2) in the left column of the Active
Inputs area to select AV sources for a presentation. Input changes take effect
immediately.
2. To apply Auto-Image to input 3, click Auto-Image (5). Auto‑Image automatically sizes
and centers the selected input to match the channel B window.
3. Click the desired button (3) to mute video only (Video Mute), audio only (Audio Mute),
or both audio and video (Mute All).
When a mute mode is selected (active), the corresponding button or buttons are red.
Click the buttons to toggle mute states, use the front panel controls, or send SIS
commands to the unit via RS-232 or USB control. When unmuted, the button changes
from red to gray.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 60

 4. To enable the meters, select the Enable Meter
checkbox below the meters (see figure 36).
Left and right channel indicators display the
audio output level (in dBFS) when there is an
active audio output. The boxes at the top of the
meters are red when audio clipping occurs and
black when audio is not clipped.

Figure 36. Audio Output Meter

Start an Ad Hoc Recording

A user logged on to the SMP, either at the user level or the administrator level, can initiate an
ad hoc (unscheduled) recording. To start an ad hoc recording from the AV Controls panel,
see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.
NOTES:
• For more information about single and dual storage modes, see Setting the
Default Recording Media on page 90) within Configuration > System
Settings.
• If the unit is set for recording destination limiting, users do not have the option to
select a different storage location. The storage location or locations are preselected
and cannot be changed from this dialog box.
• If the recording is restricted to a USB device with multiple partitions, then partition
selection within the USB drive is still available.
• Ad hoc recordings can last up to eight hours. At the end of eight hours, the SMP
stops recording.

Recording Destination Options

If the unit is set for single storage mode (recordings are saved to only one storage drive),
choose a recording destination from the Recording Destination drop-down list (see
figure 37).

Figure 37. Ad hoc Recording Destination Dialog, Single Recording Destination

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 61

• If the unit is NOT set to limit the recording destination, recording destination options are
as follows:
• auto — The recording is saved to the first available storage location that is not full.
The priority is front USB port, rear USB port, internal memory. If a USB drive has
more than one logical volume, only the volume with the largest free space for that
port in the Recording Destination drop-down list is used to store content.
To record to another volume on the device, the target location must be manually
select rather than using the auto option.
• internal — The recording is saved in the internal memory of the SMP.
• external-usbfront/usbrear/VOLUME2/, usbrear/VOLUME1/, usbrear/NEW_
VOLUME, usbrcp/volume3, and so forth — The recording is stored to the indicated
external USB drive and volume (using whatever volume name is on that drive)
connected to the front panel or rear panel USB storage port on the SMP.
• If the unit is set to limit the recording destination, you cannot change the storage
location (internal, front USB, rear USB, RCP USB). However, if the unit is set to store
recordings to one of the USB ports, and if the connected drive contains more than one
volume, you can select a volume from the Recording Destination drop-down list.
If the unit is set for secondary storage mode, the file is saved to two storage drives
simultaneously. In dual recording mode, the recording is always saved to the internal drive
as the primary storage location; only the secondary location is configurable.

Figure 38. Ad hoc Recording, Secondary Recording Destination Selection

Select the secondary storage location from the drop-down list (see figure 38).
• If the unit is set to restricted mode, you can select only from front panel USB drives
or from rear panel USB drives, depending on whether the front or the rear option is
selected in the system settings. If the unit is set to use a front panel USB drive for
the secondary storage location but a drive is connected to the rear panel USB port
instead of the front panel port, the Secondary Recording Location: drop‑down
list displays n/a (not available or not applicable) as the only option.
• If the unit is NOT set for restricted mode, you can select any available USB drive
and volume.
• If no USB drive is attached to a particular port, the option for that port is either not
shown at all or is shown as n/a.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 62

Recording Profile and Metadata
After selecting the recording destination, a preconfigured, saved recording profile can be
selected or metadata can be entered for the ad hoc recording (see figure 39).
NOTE: When a recording profile is selected from the drop-down list, the metadata fields
are grayed out.

Figure 39. Ad hoc Recording Profile and Metadata

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 63

Recording Controls
The Recording Controls page displays information about the active inputs and the output
signal, the presentation event currently in progress, and a list of upcoming presentations.
Information on this page updates every few seconds. Contents of the page are read-only
and are displayed for all users.
This page contains five panels and AV Controls (see figure 40):
1 Stream URL — The URL for the unicast and multicast streams currently in progress.
2 Storage Information — The location or locations and size of the stored file or files.
3 System Inputs and Outputs — The input and output signal parameters.
4 Current Event — The presentation currently in progress.
5 Upcoming Events — A list of upcoming scheduled events for the day.
6 AV Controls — Start an ad hoc recording or control a recording in progress (see Start
an Ad Hoc Recording on page 61 for details).
NOTE: In figure 40, the home page for a standard SMP 300 Series device is shown.
If the Horizontal Video Mirroring LinkLicense is purchased, there will be an additional
Mirroring LinkLicense tab and Horizontal Video Mirroring Status section
displaying the status of the horizontal mirroring of each input.

System Name: SMP-351-TechP21

Location: SMP-351-TechP21

6 4
1

Figure 40. AV Controls, Recording Controls Page

NOTE: For information on the AV Controls (see AV Controls Panel on page 58)
and Recording Controls panels, aside from a basic description of the Storage
Information table, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 64

Storage Information
The storage information table (see figure 41) the Stream URL panel (also available in File
Management on page 95) displays the names of the available connected storage
devices, their locations (internal, USB front panel port, USB rear panel port, USB RCP port),
total capacity, and amount of used and available storage space. It also provides an estimate
of remaining recording time for each drive and indicates (with a check mark) which drive is
selected as the only or primary recording location. If the SMP is set for dual recording mode,
a second check mark symbol indicates the drive selected as the secondary recording
location.
NOTE: The capacity of the internal drive shown in the Total column depends on the
options selected for the device. The SMP 352 has 440 Gigabytes. The SMP 351 has
the options of 80 Gigabyte models and 440 Gigabyte models available for purchase.

Figure 41. Recording Controls, Storage Information Table

NOTES:
• Recordings stored on the internal drive can be automatically uploaded to a network
server (see Setting the Default Recording Media on page 90).
• If internal storage space is nearly full and the SMP is set up to automatically upload
recordings to a server, the SMP uses an automatic disc cleanup feature to make
room for new recordings. As needed, the unit automatically deletes recordings
previously uploaded to a server, starting with the oldest recordings, until there is
enough free space on the disk.
• For details on recording deletion, see Deleting Recordings in the
SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.
• To learn how to lock a recording to prevent it from being automatically deleted, see
Locking and Unlocking a Recording Package Folder in the SMP 300 Series
Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 65

Scheduled Events
The Scheduled Events page includes three secondary tabs, Recording Calendar,
Schedule Settings (see page 67), and Publish Settings (see page 69), with
corresponding pages that allow administrators to create scheduled recordings, publish
(upload) them, and review the status of recordings.

Recording Calendar
The Recording Calendar page lists the currently selected scheduling source, publishing
destination, when the schedule was last synchronized, and has a file cleanup schedule. It
also features two different views (calendar or list) to see all recordings (in-progress events,
upcoming scheduled events, and recordings that have already taken place).

Figure 42. Recording Calendar Page

The calendar displays recordings in two views:
• Calendar View (see figure 42) — Access a detailed view dialog box about each
specific event from this page. Also, in the event that a recording does not transfer to the
designated network server or if a file needs to be uploaded again, initiate a re-upload
from the detail view.
• List View (see figure 43) — Recording events are listed in a table format. Recordings
are listed by title, starting time, course ID, creator, identifier (file name), state, and the
like. Entries can be sorted or searched in this view.

Figure 43. Recording Calendar List View

Information on this page updates every 300 seconds, but can be refreshed as needed by
clicking the Update Schedule button above the Active Profiles panel.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 66

Schedule Settings
The Schedule Settings page within Scheduled Events allows administrators to choose
how to obtain presentation schedules and, if appropriate, import calendars or connect to a
scheduling system (see figure 44). Scheduling must be set up using this page. It cannot be
set up via the front panel.

Firmware v2.xx Schedule Settings

The Firmware v2.xx Schedule Settings page has two panels: Active Profiles and
Schedule Source Configuration, which has five sub‑pages that provide options to
import calendars from sources such as an iCalendar file, a Microsoft Exchange Server
schedule, and an Opencast Matterhorn Server.
NOTE: The SMP 300 Series device has the basic Schedule Settings and Publish
Setting tabs while operating with firmware v2.xx (xx = latest version).

Figure 44. Schedule Settings Page

A note on using the SMP with an Opencast system

The SMP supports HTTP ETags (entity tags), which make it possible to cache some
scheduling information to minimize network traffic. When the SMP requests schedules
from the Opencast server system, the Opencast server sends an ETag parameter to the
SMP. Each time the SMP and server exchange schedule information, the system reads the
ETag and determines whether there were any changes to scheduled events since the last
synchronization.
• If there have been no changes, then less scheduling data is exchanged between the
SMP and the server, which reduces network traffic and the time needed for schedule
updates.
• If changes have been made, the server issues a new ETag, and the SMP updates the
schedules.
NOTE: Read the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File for details and step-
by-step procedures on scheduling.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 67

Firmware v3.xx Schedule Settings
The Firmware v3.xx Schedule Settings page within Scheduled Events allows
administrators to connect to a scheduling system (see figure 45). Scheduling must be set up
using this page. Scheduling options are available from the selected FlexOS app.
NOTE: The SMP 300 Series device has the Flex OS app options Schedule Settings
and Publish Setting tabs while operating with firmware v3.xx (xx = latest version).
To install Panopto for scheduling:
1. Download the SMP firmware v3.00 or newer from www.extron.com.
2. Install firmware via the web UI (see Firmware and License Loader in System
Settings on page 89).
3. Purchase the Enhanced Panopto Features Linklicense from www.extron.com.
NOTE: The Enhanced Panopto Features LinkLicense is required for scheduling
only.
4. Install the LinkLicense on the SMP (see Firmware and License Loader in System
Settings).
5. Download the Panopto FlexOS app v1.01 or newer from www.extron.com.
6. Install the Panopto scheduling FlexOS app (see Advanced Features on page 93).
7. In the Active Profiles panel, select Panopto in Step 1: Active PUBLISHING
Destination.
8. Select Panopto in Step 2: Active SCHEDULE Source.
9. Click the Configure button to set up Panopto integration.
NOTE:
• If Panopto is selected for both scheduling and publishing, enter the Panopto
Registration Key on the Schedule Settings page and the user is automatically
logged in on the Publish Settings page also.
• If the Panopto Server field is changed in either the Schedule Settings tab or
the Publish Settings tab, the same field is updated in both tabs.

Figure 45. Schedule Settings Page for Panopto Users

NOTE: For additional information and details on how to configure settings for Panopto
scheduling, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 68

Publish Settings
The Publish Settings page provides controls to specify and configure the server
destination to upload completed recordings.

Firmware v2.xx Publish Settings

The Firmware v2.xx Publish Settings page has two panels: Active Profiles and
Publishing Destination Configuration, which has three sub‑pages to specify the
server destination to upload completed recordings, to configure and test protocols and
settings to enable publication (uploading), and to automatically delete internal recording
folders after successfully publishing the folders.
NOTE: The SMP 300 Series device has the basic Schedule Settings and Publish
Setting tabs while operating with firmware v2.xx (xx = latest version).

Figure 46. Publish Settings Page

Select the desired radio button for an Active Schedule Source from these options:
Active Schedule Source Corresponding Tab
No Centralized Schedules (adhoc event only) Not applicable
(default)
Manually import iCalendar one time Manual Calendar Import
Import iCalendar data periodically Periodic Calendar Import
Centralized Schedule as Microsoft server Microsoft Exchange Server
Centralized Schedule as Opencast Server Opencast Server

Select the desired radio button for a publishing destination from these options:
Active Publishing Destination Corresponding Tab
No Centralized upload server (default) Not applicable
Ingest into Kaltura Hosted Video Platform Kaltura Ingest
Ingest into Opencast Server Opencast Ingest
FTP/SFTP/CIFS server Other FTP/SFTP/CIFS

For additional information and details on how to configure settings for each publishing
option, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 69

Firmware v3.xx Publish Settings
The Firmware v3.xx Publish Settings page provides controls to specify the server
destination to upload completed recordings. Once an App is installed and configured,
such as the Panopto app, the recorded file is automatically set to publish (upload) to the
applicable server.
NOTE: The SMP 300 Series device has the Flex OS app options Schedule Settings
and Publish Setting tabs while operating with firmware v3.xx (xx = latest version).
To install Panopto:
1. Download the SMP firmware v3.00 or newer from the Extron website.
2. Install firmware via the web UI (see Firmware and License Loader in System
Settings on page 89).
3. Download the Panopto Flex OS app v1.00 or newer from the Extron product page.
4. Install the app via the web UI (see Advanced Features on page 93).
To publish files to Panopto:
1. Go to Scheduled Events > Publish Settings > Publishing Destination
Configuration to configure Panopto publishing.
2. Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the Panopto server into the
Panopto Server field.
• If the Panopto Registration Key was entered on the Schedule Settings page,
the administration username and password are not requested (see figure 47). Go to
step 6 on page 71.

Figure 47. Publish Settings Page for Panopto Scheduling Users

• If Panopto scheduling is not selected on the Schedule Settings page, the
administration username and password are required (see figure 48 on page 71).
Continue to step 3 on page 71.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 70

Figure 48. Publish Settings Page for Panopto Users
3. Enter the Panopto account user name into the Administrator Username field.
4. Enter the Panopto account password in the Administrator Password field .
5. Enter the Panopto Folder ID in the Default Folder ID field.
To locate the Panopto Folder ID number:
a. Log in to your Panopto account in a web browser.
b. Click on the desired folder.
c. Click on the folder settings icon ( ) in the right corner of the page, under the
Help link.
A pop-up window opens for the selected folder.
d. Click Manage from the options in the left column.
e. Copy the alpha-numeric Folder ID.
f. Paste or enter the alpha-numeric Folder ID into the Default Folder ID field in
the SMP web UI.
6. Click the Test Connection button to have the SMP check and validate the connection
to the server.
Notification of a successful connection or an error appears as a pop-up notification at
the top of the panel.
NOTE: The SMP communicates with Panopto via HTTPS. To establish a successful
connection, the cacert.pem must be uploaded to the SMP cert folder. The latest
cacert.pem file can be downloaded from https://curl.haxx.se/ca/cacert.pem.
For additional information on how to obtain and upload a CA certificate file to the
SMP, see the SMP 300 Embedded Web Pages Help File.
7. If needed, change the address, username, or password, and retest the connection until
the server connection is successful.
8. (Optional) If the SMP is in Dual Channel mode, enter the audio channel for the Panopto
upload, Channel A or Channel B.
9. Click Save to save the settings.
10. Click Cancel to clear the username and password.
NOTE: The SMP creates an XML file describing the upload content and is uploaded
with the recording files. Title and Description metadata are listed in the XML file.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 71

Configuration
The eight pages within the Configuration page contain the core controls needed during
initial setup, for upgrading the unit, and restoring a configuration.
NOTE: Administrators can view and make changes to all settings. Those logged in as
users do not have access to the Configuration tab.

Figure 49. Configuration Tab with Subtabs

Using these pages, an administrator can:
• Configure basic AV input settings.
• Output video test patterns for setup.
• Configure output stream settings and presets.
• Set up AV encoding and presets.
• Select or configure layouts and layout presets.
• Set passwords.
NOTE: The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have
been set to the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the
passwords convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and Roles
on page 86 to change a password).

• Set up notices and alarms.

• Select preview window settings.
• Configure digital I/O ports.
• Configure basic communication, identity, time, data storage, and recording location
settings.
• Upgrade the unit by updating firmware or installing an Extron LinkLicense (see
page 3).
• Save configurations or restore a configuration from a saved file.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 72

Configuration Tab Features

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Figure 50. Configuration Tab and Sub-tabs

The pages within Configuration include the following (see figure 50):
1 Input/Output Settings (see page 74) — Change the name for each input, select the
video format for input 3, select an aspect ratio type, and enable or disable Auto‑Image,
Auto Memory, HDCP authorization for each input.
Configure audio for each channel (A and B). For SMP 351 models, adjustments are for
audio level only. For the SMP 352 and SMP 351 models, adjustments can be made to
many audio levels, filter and tone (bass and treble), and dynamic compression.
Output one of several video test patterns for use during display setup, select the refresh
rate for the local HDMI output, and configure the universal OSD content, size, and style.
2 Image Settings (see page 79) — Configure video input sampling and sizing, set up
overscanning of SMPTE input signals, and adjust picture controls (brightness, contrast,
and the like). Save or recall input and user presets.
3 Encoding & Layout (see page 81) —
From the first expandable panel in this page:
• Set up AV encoding
• Configure the streaming method, protocol, and settings
• Create encoder presets
• Create streaming presets
From the second panel:
• Configure layouts (arrangement of windows)
• Select or create layout presets
• Select the background image
• Configure metadata elements
From the third panel:
• Select metadata to associate with a recording file
• Create recording profiles
4 Users and Roles (see page 86) — Set administrator and user passwords.
NOTE: The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have
been set to the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the
passwords convert to the default, which is no password.
5 Alarms and Traps (see page 88) — Set up the e-mail server and the sender and
recipient e-mail addresses for notifications within this page. Select the alarm "priority"
level for each of several types of errors or conditions monitored by the unit.
6 System Settings (see page 89) — Configure settings in ten expandable panels. An
administrator can configure settings for unit identity, communication, storage, and the
like. Configure settings for network and serial communication, identity (unit name and
network location), and date and time. Also, update firmware, add a license, and save
configurations or restore a configuration from a saved file.
7 Advanced Features (see page 93) — Enable a web browser client option on the
unit or upload new applications such as the Digital I/O port configuration plug-in.
For more detailed information on these pages, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web
Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 73

Input/Output Settings
The three expandable panels within Input/Output Settings allow an administrator to
select a number of settings for video input, test the output, and select options for audio
output format and mute. When using firmware v3.04 or higher, the virtual inputs are available
with a fourth panel to configure the additional two virtual inputs.
NOTES:
• The SMP accepts up to two RTSP or Push ES/RTP multicast streams. It records
the two virtual inputs at its native resolution into m4v/mp4 files, and allows
re‑streaming. In Dual channel mode, the SMP can record up to 4 files plus an
audio-only file.
• The SMP does not decode and composite virtual inputs into a layout.
• For this initial release of the virtual inputs, the SMP cannot connect to a virtual input
stream that requires password authentication.
• Once the virtual input is turned on, the SMP connects with the incoming streams.
The virtual input status can be monitored from the web UI.
• Some RTSP IP camera streams do not include RTCP packets and its packet
received or dropped status is always shown as zero on web UI.

This page includes audio configuration controls for each channel (A and B):
• For the basic SMP 351 models, adjustments are for audio levels only.
• For SMP 352 models or SMP 351 models with LinkLicense, adjustments can be made
to audio levels, filter and tone (bass and treble), and dynamic compression.
To open this page, click the Configuration > Input/Output Settings.

Figure 51. Input/Output Settings Sub-tab

The Input/Output Settings page opens (see figure 52)

Figure 52. Input/Output Settings Page

NOTE: The selected input aspect ratio setting is applied to both the archive and
confidence outputs. If the confidence resolution is different, the applied aspect ratio
cannot be maintained. For example, if the archive resolution is 1080p with an aspect
ratio of 16:9, and the confidence display is 1024x768 with an aspect ratio of 4:3, the
input aspect ratio selection cannot be maintained for both.

Auto Image and Auto Memory

Select the checkbox to enable Auto-Image. Auto-Image simplifies setup by executing
image sizing, centering, and filtering adjustments with a single button push.
Select the checkbox to enable Auto Memory. Auto Memory recalls input and image settings
for signals that have previously been applied. When Auto Memory is disabled, the SMP 300
Series treats every new input as a new source.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 74

 These two features can work together depending on the configuration the user chooses.
See the table below for more information on the settings.

Auto Memory and Auto-Image Features

Auto Memory Auto-Image Information
On On "New" signals or rates not previously detected by the
device are initially set up using default parameters. Then,
Auto-Image is automatically applied and those values are
stored. The next time that signal is detected, the stored
values in the auto memory location are applied.
On Off "New" signals or rates not previously detected by the
device are set up using default parameters. If changes
are made manually to the input and picture settings, an
auto memory location is created and then recalled each
successive instance that the input is detected.
Off On When auto memory is disabled, each change in the
input sync is treated as a new signal, and Auto-Image
is triggered automatically. Any changes that are made
manually to the image and picture controls are lost each
time a new refresh rate is detected.
Off Off Each change in the input sync causes default values
to be applied to the rate. Any changes that are made
manually to the image and picture controls are lost when
a new rate is applied.

Virtual Input Configuration

When using firmware v3.04 or higher, the virtual inputs are available with a fourth panel to
configure the additional two virtual inputs. Configure the virtual inputs from this panel (see
the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File to configure the virtual inputs).

HDMI Output Configuration

Configure the preview output from this panel.

1
2
3
4

Figure 53. HDMI Output Configuration Pane

1 View the resolution of the local HDMI preview output (see the
SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File to configure the resolution).
NOTE: The resolution of the local output follows the archive encoder resolution.
When the selected archive resolution is under 720 lines (512x288, for example),
the HDMI preview output is set to 1280x720, with the video content centered in
the 720p window.

2 Select a refresh rate (50 Hz or 60 Hz) for the HDMI preview output.
3 Select the preview output displays when the SMP 300 is in dual channel mode.
4 Select a button to mute the audio, video, or both the audio and video.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 75

Changing the Font and Text for the Input Switching On‑screen Display
If optional fonts are uploaded to the SMP 300 Series, you can select and use one for
displaying OSD text instead of the default font. Size and color can be selected for the OSD
text. Optional fonts must be uploaded to the fonts folder within the SMP from the File
Management page or by using an SFTP client program before selecting it in this page.
NOTES:
• The SMP supports TrueType™ (.ttf) and OpenType® (.otf) fonts.
• To upload a font file, use the file upload utility within the File Management page
(see File Management on page 95).
• The user is responsible for obtaining necessary font licenses before uploading
fonts.
• After changing the font, some text may appear truncated in the OSDs because
characters may be wider in the selected font than in the system default font.
• The font selected here can be different from the font that is used for the metadata
overlay within a recording layout (see Configuring Metadata Elements (For
composite mode only) on page 84).

TIP: Many free, open source fonts are available at https://fonts.google.com/.

To select a different font and change the size and color:

1. Open the Input/Output Settings page (see Input/Output Settings on page 74).
2. Expand the OSD Configuration panel (see figure 54).

Figure 54. OSD Configuration Panel

3. Navigate to the OSD section and select an available font from the Font drop‑down list
(1). The selected font is immediately applied to both the input switching OSD and the
universal OSD.
4. To change the size, enter a number into the Size field or click the Up and Down arrows
(2) to adjust the value. The number is a percentage of the baseline font height, from
40 to 120%, with 100 being the default.
5. To change the font color, enter a six-character hexadecimal color value into the Color
field (3). The default color is #ffffff (white).
NOTE: Consult a hex color table, if needed. Each pair of characters represents the
three separate values that specify the levels of the component colors red, green,
and blue, respectively. For example, red is represented by #FF0000, which is
100% red, 0% green, 0% blue.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 76

Outputting and using a video test pattern
NOTE: No input signal is needed when using a test pattern for display device setup.
The OSD Configuration panel in the Input/Output Settings page allows selection and
immediate output of one of eight internally stored test patterns to the local HDMI preview
output from the SMP, as well as to the recording and output stream. Video test patterns
are helpful for calibrating connected displays or projectors for color, convergence, focus,
resolution, contrast, and aspect ratio. Audio test options are useful for testing audio output.
To select and output a test pattern:
1. Open the Input/Output Settings page.
2. Expand the OSD Configuration panel.
3. Select a pattern from the Test Patterns drop-down list. A preview of the test pattern
shows above the drop-down list. Available test patterns include the following:
Color Bars Aspect Ratio 1.33:1 Aspect Ratio 1.78:1 Aspect Ratio 1.85:1

Crop Pulse Time Stamp Universal OSD

)UL $SU  

Figure 55. Test Patterns

• The Pulse "test pattern" is an audio-only test. Select Pulse to output an audio
pulse of 400 Hz at -10 dBu for audio output testing.
• For composite mode only:
• The Time Stamp pattern displays white text in a small, gray rectangle with the
unit date and time (for example: Fri Apr 18 HH:MM:SS) on a black background
in the top left corner of the display window.
• The Universal OSD pattern consists of a small, translucent, gray rectangle
with white text overlaid atop the source video content. It shows in the upper left
of the screen. The text includes brief custom text followed by three selectable
elements separated by commas. The options for those elements are listed in
Setting up the universal OSD test pattern on page 78.
The universal OSD pattern can be displayed together with the main AV content
because it overlays the video rather than replacing it. As a result, the universal
OSD pattern can be used at any time, not just during setup. It can also serve as
an on screen label for presentations, in addition to metadata labels (which may
or may not be displayed, depending on the screen layout) (see Encoding &
Layout on page 81 for more information on metadata within screen layouts
and on selecting content for the metadata fields).
The selected test pattern is immediately output to the display and reflected in the preview
in the AV Controls panel on the left of the screen. The test pattern displays until another
pattern, or Off is selected from the Test Pattern drop-down list, or until unit power is
recycled.
NOTE: When a test pattern is selected, it is overlaid atop the source AV and streamed
to the display, stream, and recording. If Off is selected, the test pattern is turned off.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 77

Setting up the universal OSD test pattern
To set up the universal OSD test pattern (for composite mode only):
1. Open the Input/Output Settings page.
2. Expand the OSD Configuration panel at the bottom of the page.
3. Select Universal OSD from the Test Patterns drop-down list. The fields and drop-
down menus in the Universal OSD section become accessible.
4. Enter the text (up to 16 characters) into the Display Text field within the Universal
OSD area. This is the first text that appears in the universal OSD, and can function as a
brief title or description.
5. Select an information category from the Information 1 drop-down list, and also, if
desired, from the Information 2 and Information 3 drop-down lists.

Figure 56. Universal OSD Information Selection

As an example, when File destination is selected, the OSD text might be Front
USB or Internal Drive Only, depending on the current system settings.
The categories are identical to those used in the SIS information commands (such as
1i, 2i, 3i, and so forth). For reference, see the Command and Response Tables
starting on page 114.
If desired, select an information category from the Information 2 drop-down list and
select another category from the Information 3 drop-down list.
Changes are saved automatically and applied shortly after being selected. The universal
OSD text appears on-screen in this format:
Display Text, Information 1, Information 2, Information 3.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 78

 See figure 57 for examples of how the configuration settings (on the left) translate to the
universal OSD (on the right).

REC1,CPU Usage 56%

00:10:33,20:10:51

OSD, SMP 351,1*4,up*100*full

Figure 57. Universal OSD Information Selection and Display

Input Switching OSD

Select the Display "No Source" OSD to indicate no video input checkbox to remove
the check mark and disable this OSD.

Figure 58. “No Source” OSD Selection

When enabled, enter a number into the How many seconds should Input Switch OSD be
displayed? field or use the Up and Down arrows next to the field to select a number from 0
to 300 seconds.
By default, the SMP displays a "No Source" OSD when there is not an active video input.
NOTE: If Active Input in Full Screen is selected in from the When there’s no
input, display drop-down in Configuration>Encoding & Layout> Layout
Presets, the "No Source" OSD will not appear.
For more options, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

Image Settings
Use the controls within the Image Settings page within the Configuration tab to
configure video input sampling and sizing, set up overscanning of SMPTE input signals, and
adjust picture controls (brightness, contrast, and similar). Also save or recall input and user
presets from this page.
NOTE: A user must be logged in as an administrator to see or change these settings.
To open this page, click the Configuration tab at the top of the SMP Series embedded
web pages and then click the Image Settings tab on the second tier of tabs.

Figure 59. Image Settings Sub-tab

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 79

The Image Settings page opens (see figure 60).

Figure 60. Image Settings Page

This page has a collapsible panel with seven sections (see figure 60):
1 Input Config — Select the input to be configured.
NOTE: You must select an input from the Input Config panel in the upper left
of this page before you can adjust the image settings or save or recall presets.
Selecting an input within the Image Settings page also changes the active input.
2 Picture Controls — Alter the quality of the image by changing brightness, contrast,
color, and tint.
3 Signal Sampling — Configure the size, location, and aspect ratio of the currently
selected input or select Auto-Image, Auto-Image & Fill, or Auto‑Image & Follow.
4 Overscan — Set the amount (0, 2.5%, or 5%) of picture enlargement applied to each
video signal type for any SMPTE standard input.
5 Input Presets — Save up to 128 presets per input or recall one of those presets per
input, each with a combination of signal type, signal sampling, and picture controls.
6 User Presets — Save or recall up to 16 presets of picture controls per input.
7 SDI Settings (SMP 351 3G-SDI and 352 3G-SDI only) — Set the quantization range for
SDI signals from input 5.
Except for the overscan settings and input preset saving and recalling, the settings
on this page can also be configured using the front panel menu and controls (see the
SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File for more information).

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 80

 Selecting SDI-specific Settings
For input 5 of an SMP 351 3G-SDI and SMP 352 3G-SDI you can select the quantization
range, which sets the black and white level for the RGB data of the SDI input.
To set the quantization:
Select one of the following options from the Quantization Range drop-down list:

Figure 61. Quantization Range Drop-down List

• Legal — Select this option when the YCbCr video data of the SDI source (input 5) is
within the "legal" range (64-940 for luma and 64-960 for chroma).
• Full — Select this option when the quantized YCbCr video data of the SDI source
uses the full range of available bandwidth.
NOTES:
• The SDI settings are disabled for inputs 1 through 4.
• Most SDI sources use the "legal" range.

Encoding & Layout

The controls within the Encoding & Layout page configure signal streaming and encoding
and also permit selection or configuration of video layouts. A user must be logged in as an
administrator to see or change these settings.
To open this page, click the Configuration > Encoding & Layout.

Figure 62. Configuration Tab, Encoding & Layout

The Encoding & Layout page opens. It features three expandable panels:
• Encoding Presets — Configure audio encoding, video encoding, and streaming
parameters, then create and save or recall presets of those settings.
• Layout Presets — Set the size, position, and aspect ratio of video windows for both
channels and save those settings as a preset or recall default or user-created preset,
also set the background image and configure metadata elements.
• Recording Profiles — Select metadata content to associate with an individual
recording file and save it to one of 32 Recording Profiles that can be recalled for
later use.
NOTES:
• Some of the encoder settings can also be set using the front panel menu
and controls (see Picture Control Menu on page 30) or using Extron SIS
commands (see the Command and Response Tables on page 114).
• Layout presets are set up in this web page or via the front panel menu (see the
SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File for additional information).

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 81

 Encoding Presets
Encoding presets are combinations of settings for audio and video encoding. The recording
uses the highest quality signal encoding (archive encoding), and the preview (confidence
view) displayed within the embedded web pages uses the lowest quality encoding
(confidence encoding) of the encoding streams.
• SMP 351 models support up to two encodes (archive and confidence), one recording,
one local output, and live streams simultaneously.
• SMP 352 models and SMP 351 models with LinkLicense support up to three
encodes (archive A, archive B, and confidence), two recordings, one local output, and
live streams simultaneously.
NOTE: In composite mode, the video encoding resolution of the archive encoder must
always be higher than or equal to that of the confidence encoder.
Any of the default encoder presets or user-created presets can be recalled and applied to
a recording session (archive encoder) and stream using the embedded web pages. Presets
can also be recalled using the front panel menu and controls (see Presets Menu on
page 28) or SIS Commands (see the Presets on page 124).
NOTE: Encoding presets must be selected prior to the start of a recording. You cannot
change encoding settings during an active recording. For custom resolutions, the
resolution height and width must be specified before the custom rate can be used.

The first 18 presets are factory set. Presets 1 through 9 are for popular, general AV uses
with settings from 1080p High (1080p resolution at 8000 Kbps) to Confidence (515x288
at 350 Kbps). Presets 10 through 18 provide convenient settings that make it easy to
integrate the SMP into an Opencast system, especially when using dual channel encoding.
Some are tailored for speaker flavor, some for presentation flavor. Factory defined
presets 33 through 42 support Panopto quality settings. For more information, see the
SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.
NOTE: Some of the parameters available on this page can also be set individually using
front panel controls.

An overview of encoding
Each of the two encoders for the SMP 300 Series can be used for multiple purposes. The
table below shows how each encoder is typically used and the differences. For details, see
the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

Encoding Stream Usage Conditions or Differences Comment

Archive Encoding Recording Refresh rate: 5 to 30 fps Highest quality and
• One stream for SMP 351 resolution
Local HDMI output through Refresh rate: 50 or 60 Hz.
models and all models in the rear panel Output Does not use the compression
composite encoding mode (preview) port settings specified in the archive
• Two streams (channel A, encoder preset. This output
channel B) for dual encoding bypasses compression and
mode in SMP 352 models encoding.
and SMP 351 models with
LinkLicense Live stream via the LAN Refresh rate: 5 to 30 fps (same as
port and network if using a the recording stream)
decoder application
Confidence Encoding Preview window in the AV For composite
Controls panel encoding mode,
confidence encoding
Live stream via the LAN
must always be
port and network if using a
the same or lower
decoder application
resolution than archive
encoding

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 82

Streaming Presets
Streaming Presets allow the user to quickly switch between various streaming options.
There are 32 streaming presets that can be saved or recalled to archive and confidence.
Streaming presets save the following parameters:
STREAMING PRESETS
Preset name Multicast IP/destination (for Multicast only)
Streaming method and protocol QoS (for Push streaming only)
Stream port SAP setting (for Push streaming only)
MTU RTMP publish URL (for RTMP push only)
TTL Destination IP/hostname
RTSP Stream Name Advanced section of RTMP, such as RTMP
RTSP over HTTP port (Pull streaming only) port, primary and backup server URL,
stream name, username, and password (for
RTMP push only)

Audio Encoding
Which input signals are combined to form the encoded audio output vary depending on
audio channel selection and the status of the dual analog mono option, as detailed in the
following table:

Audio Encoding Channel Channel B Dual Channel Input and Output

Selection Analog Mono Status
Channel A Disabled Enc L = ChA L
Enc R = ChA R
Channel B Disabled Enc L = ChB L
Enc R = ChB R
ChB Dual Mono Enabled Enc L = ChB L + ChB R
Enc R = ChB L + ChB R
ChA + ChB Disabled Enc L = ChA L + ChB L
Enc R = ChA R + ChB R
ChA + ChB Dual Mono Enabled Enc L = ChA L + ChB L + ChB R
Enc R = ChA R + ChB L + ChB R

NOTES:
• Enc = Encoded output channel
• Ch n = Input channel n
• L = Left, R = Right
• Dual analog mono audio is available only on input channel B. If you enable this
feature, all audio input for channel B should be analog mono, though digital stereo
is accepted on input 4.
• Set the dual analog mono audio status in Configuration > Input/Output
Settings > Input/Output Configuration.
• Select the audio encoding channel in Configuration > Encoding & Layout >
Encoding Presets > Channel Selection.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 83

Both left and right encoded audio signals (Enc L and Enc R) are incorporated into all the
outputs (whether recordings or streams):
• Archive (composite) or archive channel A and archive channel B
• Confidence
• Local HDMI preview output
The SMP 300 Series has two independent recording options, which can be selected
together or independently:
• Recording Enabled — Select this checkbox to record a video as an mp4/m4v file. The
drop-down list provides two video recording options: Audio + Video and Video Only.
• Audio-only Recording Enabled — Select this checkbox for a recording of only the
audio as an m4a file.
For more audio processing information, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages
Help File.

Layout presets (for composite mode only)

NOTES:
• A user must be logged in as an administrator to see or change these settings.
• Users can recall layout presets when setting up recordings.
• Layout presets and metadata configuration are available only in composite
encoding mode.
Layout presets define where on the screen the video windows for each input channel
are located and how big each window is. Each channel (A and B) has a defined aspect
ratio, size, and position. Depending on the layout arrangement, a layout can also include
metadata text and some areas that let a black background or background images be visible.
In the Layout Presets panel, set up some of the metadata that can appear in streams.
Any of the default or user-created layout presets can be recalled and applied. Layouts apply
to all streams at once: a recording session, streams, and the preview stream within the
AV Controls panel (see AV Controls Panel on page 58). Presets can also be recalled
using SIS commands (see Layout Presets (for composite mode only) on page 125).
The first 12 presets are factory default layouts. Presets 13 through 16 are unassigned and
unconfigured. All presets can be configured through the controls in the Encoding & Layout
page (for additional information, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File).

Configuring Metadata Elements (For composite mode only)

Select and specify the metadata text content that is incorporated into the video and used
for other purposes. Also, select the font and font color to use for that text overlay within the
video.
NOTE: The metadata display and the metadata configuration controls are disabled
when dual channel encoding mode is active in SMP 352 models and SMP 351
models with LinkLicense.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 84

Changing the Font Used for the Metadata Overlay
If optional fonts are uploaded to the SMP, they are available to select for displaying metadata
text instead of the default font.
NOTES:
• The SMP supports TrueType™(.ttf) and OpenType® (.otf) fonts.
• To upload a font file, use the file upload utility within the File Management page.
• The user is responsible for obtaining any necessary font licenses before uploading
fonts to the SMP 300 Series.
• After changing the font, some text may appear truncated in the on-screen text
because characters may be wider in the selected font than in the system default
font.
• The font selected for the overlay can be different from the font used for both the
input switching OSD and the universal OSD (see Changing the Font and Text
Settings Used for the Input Switching On‑screen Display on page 76).
• To select a different font color, enter the six-character hexadecimal color value. The
default font color is white (ffffff).
• For additional information on how to select a different font or font color, see the
SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

TIP: Many free, open source fonts are available at https://fonts.google.com/.

Recording Profiles
Recording profiles can be configured, saved, and recalled in the Recording Profiles
expandable panel. Fill in the appropriate fields with the metadata text content to be
associated with an individual recording file. There are 32 recording profiles that can be saved
or recalled to archive and confidence files.
Recording profiles save the following parameters:
RECORDING PROFILE FIELDS
Contributor Presenter
Copyright Publisher
Course Relation
Coverage Source
Description Subject
Format Title
Language Type

The SMP 300 Series lists the currently Active Profile, and the Default Profile can
be selected from a drop-down list. The specified default profile is used if a user starts a
recording without choosing a profile.
Any recording profile can be recalled and applied before starting a recording. Recording
Profiles can also be recalled, but not created, by using SIS commands (see Recording
Profiles on page 132).
For additional information on Recording Profiles, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web
Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 85

Users and Roles
In the Users and Roles page within Configuration, an administrator can set up both
administrator and user level passwords. Passwords are not required, though they are
recommended for controlling access to configuration functions.
Passwords can be set up only via this page or using SIS commands (see Remote
Communication and Control starting on page 106). They cannot be set via the front
panel.
NOTES:
• The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have been set to
the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the passwords
convert to the default, which is no password.
• An administrator password is required before a user password can be set.
• If only an administrator password is set, only administrators are able to log in to the
SMP 300 Series web pages. Users have no access.
• To allow user access to a password-protected unit, set both an administrator
password and a user password, and users must log in using the user password.

To open this page, click the Configuration tab at the top of the SMP 300 Series
embedded web pages and then click the Users and Roles tab on the second tier of tabs.

Figure 63. Configuration Tab, Users and Roles Sub-tab

The Users and Roles page opens, showing the Password pane (see figure 64).

Figure 64. Password Panel

Setting passwords
If no passwords are set, anyone who opens the internal web pages is connected with
administrator-level access and can make changes to all settings. To limit access and prevent
changes to system configuration, the following options are available:
• Set an administrator level password only — This option allows only administrators
to access the SMP 300 Series web pages. End users cannot log in to use the web
pages.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 86

• Set both an administrator level password and a user level password — This
allows administrators to log in and manage all aspects of the SMP 300 Series. Users
can log in to use just the AV Controls panel and the Recording Controls page.

3
1
2
6

4
5

Figure 65. Password Panel

To set passwords:
1. Enter a desired password, at least four characters long, into the Administrator
Password field (see figure 65, 1) in the Login ID: admin panel.
• Passwords must consist of any readable characters, up to 128 characters.
• Passwords cannot contain a single space or the "pipe" ( | ) character.
• Passwords are case-sensitive.
2. Enter the same password into the Confirm Password field (2) directly below the
Administrator Password field. Once a password is entered, the fields in the Login
ID: user section are accessible.
3. If no user password is set, click Save (3) in the upper right of the Password panel.
To set a user password, complete steps 4 through 6.
4. To set a user level password, type a desired password into the User Password field
(4) in the Login ID: user panel.
5. Type the same password into the Confirm Password field (5) directly below the
User Password field.
6. Click Save (3). Both the administrator and user passwords are saved.

Clearing Passwords
To remove (clear) a password, click Clear (6) corresponding to the administrator or user
password and click Save (3) to remove.
NOTE: When the administrator password is cleared, the user password is also cleared.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 87

Alarms and Traps
In the Alarms and Traps page within Configuration, an administrator can configure
e-mail account and communication settings to allow the unit to send notification e-mails.
This is also the location for selecting whether to log, display a message about, or send an
email about various conditions and errors experienced by the SMP 300 Series.
To open this page, click the Configuration tab (see figure 66) at the top of the SMP
embedded web pages and click the Alarms and Traps tab on the second tier of tabs.

Figure 66. Configuration Tab, Alarms and Traps Subtab

The Alarms and Traps page opens, showing the two panels (see figure 67).

Figure 67. Alarms and Traps Page

1 Alarm Notifier Destinations — Enter email sender and receiver information for alarm
notifications (see the Alarm table on page 50 for more information on the alarms).
2 Alarm Message List — Choose the priority for a given alarm on the SMP, or disable
the alarm. The options for an alarm are:
• Notify — The SMP sends an email and unsolicited SIS response.
• Display — The indicate alarm LED is active on the front panel, AAP or wallplate,
and web page. The event is also logged.
• Log — The SMP records the alarm in the events log only.
• Disabled — The alarm is disabled.
NOTES:
• If internal storage space is nearly full (when the disk space alarm is triggered) and
the SMP is set up to automatically upload recordings to a server (see Publish
Settings on page 69), then the SMP uses an automatic disc cleanup feature to
make room for new recordings. The unit automatically deletes previous recordings
that have been uploaded to a server, starting with the oldest recordings, until there
is enough free space on the disk.
• All active alarms can be manually cleared by an administrator via the web page.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 88

System Settings
Controls within eight of the twelve panels in the System Settings page are essential during
initial setup of the unit. The four other panels contain features used infrequently for updating
the unit, restoring a configuration, or limiting access to front panel controls.
NOTE: A user must be logged in as an administrator to see or change these settings.

Figure 68. System Settings Panels

The panels are:
1 Unit Identification — Set the system (unit) name and a description for its location. This
is also the location of the model name and description, part number, firmware version,
overall unit temperature, part number, serial number, and license information.
2 Date and Time — Set the date, time, time zone, and settings for syncing with one or
more NTP (network time protocol) servers.
3 Networking — Set the IP addresses for the unit, gateway, and DNS server, as well
as the subnet mask and port numbers for a variety of port types, or enable or disable
SNMP.
4 Recording Media Selection — Set recording parameters, such as destination,
destination priority, and secondary recording mode.
5 Recording Limits — Set recording file size and duration limits for ad hoc recordings.
6 Default Recording File Names — Choose what type of information is used to
compose names of recordings and what type of file extension (m4a, m4v, and mp4).
7 Marks and Thumbnails — Choose whether to have the SMP produce normal (small)
size thumbnail images of the recorded video or thumbnail images the same size
(resolution) as the archive encoder settings.
8 Serial — Set the baud rate and protocol for the rear panel remote control serial port.
9 Firmware and License Loader — Initiate firmware uploads and enter LinkLicense
information (see Extron LinkLicense on page 3).
NOTE: All streaming configurations go back to default when firmware is updated.
¢ Backup and Restore — Back up current SMP or IP configuration settings, or restore a
previously saved configuration file.
£ Executive Mode — Enable or disable various levels of front panel lock-out to limit
access to the controls and functions of the SMP.
¤ SSL Certificate — Import user supplied SSL certificates.
Many of the system setup tasks must be performed within these pages (see the
SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File). However, some of the settings can also
be set using the front panel controls or Extron SIS commands.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 89

Setting the Default Recording Media
To choose where a recording is saved during its creation:
NOTE: Secondary storage mode is not available and cannot be selected if dual channel
encoding mode is active.
1. In the System Settings page, click the Recording Media Selection panel bar.

Figure 69. Recording Media Selection Panel

2. Use the drop-down lists in Set Recording Destination Priority (see figure 69, 1)
to designate where the SMP stores a recording when Auto is selected as the recording
destination or a recording destination is unavailable.
The default destination priority is: RCP USB, Front USB, Rear USB, Internal.
3. An Admin can disable one or more Record Destinations to prevent a user from
recording to that location by deselecting the checkbox or checkboxes. For example, if
the Front USB is deselected, the SMP does not recognize a USB drive inserted into the
Front USB port, and the recording file is not saved to this Record Destination.
To save recordings to a single location (to use single storage mode):
a. Verify that the Secondary Recording Enabled checkbox (2) is disabled
(unchecked).
b. Select the checkbox or checkboxes in the Record Destination panel (3) to
enable recording destinations.
• Internal — This forces the unit to store recordings only in its internal storage,
even if USB drives are attached to the front and rear panel ports.
• Front USB, Rear USB, or RCP USB — These options force the unit to record to
a USB drive connected to the corresponding port.
NOTES:
• At least one record location must be enabled as a record destination.
• The Internal recording destination must be enabled for file publishing.
• The SMP automatically uploads recording files to a network server only if
files are recorded to and stored on the internal drive. If only a USB option is
selected, files cannot be auto-uploaded to a server.
• When a record destination is disabled, the SMP will not report a USB flash
drive attached to a port.
• Secondary recording must be turned off to record virtual input into files.
• The RCP USB location is grayed out if an RCP 101 is not detected.
• All locations are enabled by default. Select the checkbox to deselect.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 90

4. To save recordings to two locations at once (dual recording mode):
NOTE: Secondary storage mode is not available and cannot be selected if dual
channel encoding mode is active.
a. Select (check) the Secondary Recording Enabled checkbox (see figure 70, 1).

Figure 70. Recording Media Selection - Enable Dual Recording

• The selection in the Recording Destination: field changes to Internal
Drive (2). This cannot be changed in dual recording mode. The recording is
always stored to the internal drive.
• The Secondary Recording Destination: drop-down list is enabled (3).
b. Select an option (Auto, Front USB, Rear USB, or RCP USB) from the Secondary
Recording Destination: drop-down list.
• This designates which storage drive (if one is connected at that location and it
has been enabled in the Record Destination pane) is used to store a second
copy of the recording.
• If Auto is selected, the secondary recording destination is based upon the
selections made in step 2 on page 90. Ensure Internal and the desired
secondary recording destination are enabled (see figure 69, 3 on page 90).
5. Optionally, limit users to the storage drive location selected in step 2 or the Secondary
Recording Destination specified in step 4 (without the ability to change locations).
To do so, select (check) the Record Destination Limiter checkbox (4).
NOTE: If the Record Destination Limiter checkbox is selected and the
setting has been saved by clicking the Save button within the Recording Media
Selection panel, destination settings cannot be changed and secondary storage
mode cannot be enabled or disabled until the Record Destination Limiter is
disabled and that change is saved.
Once the Record Destination Limiter has been disabled, make changes to
the other settings and save the changes.

Setting the Recording File Limits

Recording files can be limited (portions of long recordings) to a specific size. If this feature is
enabled (default), each time a recording file reaches the specified size, the file is saved and
the SMP creates a new file (up to the specified size) for the next portion of the recording,
and so on until the recording event ends or the SMP runs out of storage space.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 91

To set a recording file size limit:
1. In the System Settings page, click the Recording Limits panel bar.

Figure 71. Limit Recording Size

2. Select (check) the Recording File Size Limiter checkbox (see figure 71, 1).
3. Enter a number into the Maximum File Size field or use the Up and Down arrows (2)
next to the field to select a number. The file size can be limited to any size between
100 MB to 3800 MB (3.8 GB).
• The default is 3584 MB.
• If the Recording File Size Limiter checkbox is deselected, the size limit
function is disabled, and the entire recording is stored in a single file.
4. Click Save, or Cancel (3) to discard the changes.
NOTE: For an SMP set for secondary storage mode with unlimited file size selected, the
recording saved on the internal storage drive is saved in a single file. However, if the
recording is saved to a USB storage device with FAT32 formatting, recording creates
multiple 4 GB files as a result of the FAT32 size limit. Use a USB drive formatted for
NTFS in order to avoid the file size limit.

Ad hoc recordings can be limited to a specific duration. If this feature is enabled, the SMP
stops recording an event after the specified number of hours.
To limit the ad hoc recording duration:
1. In the System Settings page, click the Recording Limits panel bar.

Figure 72. Limit Ad hoc Recording Duration

2. Select (check) the limit Recording Ad hoc Duration Limiter checkbox (see figure 72,
1).
3. Enter a number into the Maximum Ad hoc Record Duration field or use the Up and
Down arrows (2) next to the field to select a number from 0 to 24 hours.
• By default, the Recording Ad hoc Duration Limiter checkbox is not checked
and there is no limit on duration.
• Enter time in full hours only. Fractions of an hour are not saved.
4. Click Save, or click Cancel (3) to discard the changes.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 92

Advanced Features
In the Advanced Features page within the Configuration page, an administrator can do
the following:
• Set the SMP to run a web browser client application for direct control on site for limited
network (IP) configuration when a network-connected computer is not available.
• Upload a FlexOS plugin application to add functions and configuration options, then use
the plugin to configure features of the SMP.
NOTE: These settings cannot be set via the front panel.
To open this page, click Configuration > Advanced Features.

Figure 73. Configuration tab, Advanced Features Sub-tab

The Advanced Features page opens to the Browser Client and FlexOS Apps panels.

Figure 74. Advanced Features Page

Using an Internal Browser Client, a Keyboard and Mouse to Control the

SMP 300 Series
Configure the SMP to run a web browser client application for direct control, if a stand‑alone
computer is not available on site. If enabled, the internal browser provides access to a
subset of the Network (IP) Settings configuration pane.
To set up the SMP for local control using its internal browser client:
1. On a computer connected to the same network as the SMP, open a browser, enter the
IP address of the unit into the address field, and connect to the embedded web pages.
2. Click the Configuration tab at the top of the SMP 300 Series embedded web pages
and then click the Advanced Features tab on the second tier of tabs.
3. Select the Enable the browser client? checkbox (see figure 74, 1) in the Browser
Client panel.
NOTE: The following steps do not require a computer and do not require the SMP to
be connected to a network.
4. Connect a monitor, keyboard, and mouse directly to the SMP 300 Series (see Control
System and External Device Connections on page 16).
• Connect the keyboard to one of the rear panel Mouse/Keyboard USB connectors.
• Connect the mouse to the other rear panel Mouse/Keyboard USB connectors.
• Connect a display to the local HDMI Preview Out port on the rear panel.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 93

5. By default, the local output shows the preview (confidence) image on the connected
monitor or display. To switch between viewing the preview and viewing the embedded
web pages, press the <Ctrl + Alt + S> keys on the keyboard connected to the
SMP 300 Series.
NOTE: The default web page allows configuration of the network settings.
6. Use the mouse and keyboard to navigate through the pages and panels to make
changes as needed.
7. When all the changes have been completed, press the <Ctrl + Alt + S> keys on the
keyboard to switch back from the browser client to the preview display.

Uploading a FlexOS Application to the SMP 300 Series

Occasionally Extron develops supplemental applications or plug-ins to enhance or add
functions or control options to the product. For example, download a plug-in application to
use the embedded web pages to configure and monitor the rear panel digital I/O ports. The
controls in the Advanced Features page upload the application (app) to the SMP (see the
SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File).

Figure 75. FlexOS Apps Panel

NOTE: You may need to log in to the Extron website using your Extron Insider
account information in order to download the software.
Contact your Extron representative if you need a login ID.

Available applications
Digital I/O configuration — The digital I/O configuration (Digital I/O) application is
included with the SMP 300 Series. Use it to rename each digital input/output port, set its
use mode (input or output, with or without pull-up), create labels for on and off states, and
see the status of each port. Additionally, link monitored conditions, such as the state of
a particular I/O port, a specific recording mode, or mute state or alarm with actions with
this application. These actions include changing an input, recording mode, or mute mode,
or swapping channels or setting a chapter marker. For further information, see FlexOS
Applications on page 104.
Panopto app — This optional application enables importing Panopto Schedules and file
publishing to Panopto. The Panopto app requires firmware v3.00 or newer. Scheduling
and RTMP/RTMPS streaming to Panopto are enabled by Enhanced Panopto Features
LinkLicense.
Kaltura app — This optional application enables scheduling, RTMP streaming, and
publishing directly to Kaltura KMC. The Kalutua app requires firmware v3.00 or newer.
Scheduling and RTMP/RTMPS streaming to Kaltura KMC are enabled by Enhanced Kaltura
Features LinkLicense.
iCalendar app - This optional application enables ingesting periodic schedules from
Outlook, Google Calendar, and other scheduling services. The iCalendar app requires
firmware v3.01 or newer.
Additional applications may become available in the future for download from the Extron
website.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 94

File Management
The File Management page contains a directory of files stored in the SMP 300 Series and
any connected shared drives on the network, which can be deleted, renamed or locked. It
also contains a file upload utility to add new files to the SMP for use as background images.
Use this page to connect the SMP to shared network drives and upload or download files
from the SMP through an SFTP client.
Only users logged in to the SMP 300 Series with administrator privileges have access to the
File Management page and can make changes.
To open this page, click the File Management tab:

Figure 76. File Management Tab

The File Management page opens to the File Directory (see figure 77, 1), File
Upload Utility (2), Accessing Internal Filesystem (3) panes, and the storage
information table (4):

Figure 77. Configuration, File Management Tab

The storage information table (also on the Recording Controls page) lists the names of
the available connected storage devices, their locations (internal, USB front panel port, USB
rear panel port), total capacity, and amount of used and available storage space. It also
provides an estimate of remaining recording time for each drive.

Figure 78. Storage Information Table

This list can be sorted. Click on any of the table headings or click the arrow that appears
when you mouse over a table heading and select a sort order from the drop-down list.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 95

 NOTES:
• Recordings stored on the internal drive can be automatically uploaded to a
network server (configured in Configuration > Schedule Settings > Publish
Settings). If internal storage space is nearly full, the SMP uses a disc cleanup
feature to make room for new recordings. As needed, the unit automatically deletes
old recordings that have already been uploaded to a server, starting with the
oldest recordings, until there is enough free space on the disk. The unit removes
recordings that have not been published if additional free space is needed.
• The recording time estimate for the internal drive considers space that can be
made available from recordings that are eligible for automatic deletion. At times,
the total listed space may not equal the total calculated space (used + available +
system).
• The total space listed for the internal drive may be larger than the sum of used
space plus available space because the total includes space reserved for system
files.
• The available space might be larger than the difference between the total and used
space because used space includes deletable recordings.
• For detailed information on disk space and storage, see the SMP 300 Series
Embedded Web Pages Help File.
Add a Network Share
Network servers or network-attached storage drives (network shares) can be added to
the file list so the SMP 300 Series can access files and folders stored on shared network
resources. These shares can store background images.
NOTE: The size of network shares is initially unknown and there can be significant
performance issues if the entire contents of every network share is indexed on every
filter or search request. To provide the best performance with available resources, the
searches and filtering for network shares is limited to the layer immediately below the
level that the user manually expands. If the user fully expands the share, then it is fully
indexed, searched, and filtered (see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help
File to add a network share).

Upload and Download Files Using an SFTP Client

NOTE: Recordings can be downloaded from the SFTP client but recordings cannot be
deleted from the client.
Automatic file uploading to a network location (see Setting the Default Recording Media
on page 90), the recording re‑transfer (re-upload) option within the Scheduled Events
page, and the upload option on the File Management page for uploading background
image files to the unit satisfy most file transfer needs. However, if there is a need to transfer
files into or out of the SMP outside of those controls, use an SFTP client utility.
To use an SFTP client utility to transfer files:
1. Click the File Management tab.
2. Copy the URL from the Accessing Internal Filesystem pane. The URL includes
the SFTP protocol name (sftp), the address of the SMP, and the logical port number
(usually 22022) of the LAN port. For example, sftp://192.168.194.28:22022.
3. Open an SFTP client program of your choice.
4. Paste the URL from the SMP 300 Series into the host name or host address field of the
SFTP client program. If necessary, delete sftp from the URL and select SFTP from a
different field or menu, and remove the port number from the URL and paste it into a
port number field.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 96

 5. If an administrator username and password are set for the unit, enter those in the
appropriate fields in the SFTP client.
6. Log into or connect to the SMP.
7. Use the SFTP client software to copy files (recordings, logs, background images) to and
from the internal storage folders on the SMP.
8. Disconnect from the SMP (close the SFTP session).

Troubleshooting
The five pages within the Troubleshooting page contain controls typically used during
initial setup to test connections, and then later if product support issues arise. A logged in
administrator can:
• View current system conditions and connections.
• View event logs and alarms.
• Test network connections.
• Reset the unit.
NOTES:
• Only administrators have access to the Troubleshooting tab and can see and
make changes to all settings.
• The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have been set to
the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the passwords
convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and Roles on page 86
to change a password).

Features of the Troubleshooting Page

System Name: SMP-351-TechP21

Location: SMP-351-TechP21
1 2 3 4 5
Figure 79. Troubleshooting Tab
The pages within Troubleshooting are:
1 Status (see page 98) — Displays information about the firmware and web page
versions, system and component temperatures, fan speeds, Ethernet connection, MAC
address, date and time, as well as details about the bit rates for audio and both the
archive and confidence encoding streams.
2 Logs (see page 99) — Displays a list (log) of alerts and notices for any event set up
for any status other than Disabled in Configuration > Alarms and Traps > Alarm
Message List. The log can be sorted by date and time, severity, DB ID, or message. It
can also be filtered, or exported to a CSV file.
3 Alarms (see page 100) — Similar to Logs, this page displays a list of the more severe
events that trigger alarms. The list can be sorted, filtered, or exported to a CSV file.
Individual alarms can be cleared. Only active and recently active alarms are displayed.
4 Diagnostic Tools (see page 101) — Test network connections using a ping utility, a
route (tracert) function, or Nmap test. Also, run other diagnostic tests that generate a
debugging log.
5 System Resets (see page 102) — Initiate a unit reboot, delete all stored content and
format the internal storage, or perform one of five different types of reset.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 97

Status
The Status page within the Troubleshooting page displays factory-defined and
user‑defined information about the unit. This page contains the unit name, part number,
firmware version, MAC address, location description, and related information about the unit.
It also displays the current audio bit rate and the video bit rates for all encoding streams.
Some of the information in this page can also be found using SIS commands (see
Command and Response Tables starting on page 114) or the front panel (see Status
Menu on page 48).
To open this page, click the Troubleshooting tab at the top of the SMP 300 Series
embedded web pages and then click the Status tab on the second tier of tabs (see
figure 80).

Figure 80. Troubleshooting Tab, Status Sub-tab

The Status page opens, showing the Detailed System Status and Encoder Status
panels (see figure 81).

Figure 81. Status Page

All of the items on this page are read-only except:
• The hyperlink to the Extron website Find new firmware on Extron.com (see figure 81,
1) where updated firmware for the unit is located.
• The Date & Time Sync button (2) commands the unit to sync its internal clock time
and date with the settings from an NTP server.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 98

Logs
The Logs page within Troubleshooting displays a list (log) of alerts and notices for any
event set up for a status other than Disabled in the Configuration > Alarms and Traps
> Alarm Message panel. All log entries are read-only. The logs can be sorted, filtered,
searched, or exported to a comma-separated values (CSV) file.
To open this page, click the Troubleshooting tab at the top of the embedded web pages,
then click the Logs tab on the second tier of tabs (see figure 82).

Figure 82. Troubleshooting Tab, Logs Sub-tab

The Logs page opens, showing filtering controls and the log list (see figure 83).

Figure 83. Logs Page

For further information, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 99

Alarms
The Alarms tab within Troubleshooting displays a list of alerts for events as
determined in Configuration > Alarms and Traps > Alarm Message List. Alarm list
entries are read‑only. The alarm list can be sorted, filtered, searched, or exported to a
comma‑separated values (CSV) file.
To open this page, click the Troubleshooting tab at the top of the SMP 300 Series
embedded web pages, then click the Alarms tab on the second tier of tabs (see figure 84).

Figure 84. Troubleshooting, Alarms Sub-tab

The Alarms page opens, showing filtering controls and the alarm history list (see figure 85).

Figure 85. Alarms Page, Alarm History Panel

• Active, unresolved alarms are displayed as red text.
• To clear or remove an alarm, select the row it is listed in and click Clear Selected
Alarm(s).
• To mute an alarm, so that it does not appear in the alarm list again the next time it is
triggered, select the checkbox for that alarm in the Muted column.
For further information about the Alarms page, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web
Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 100

Diagnostic Tools
The Diagnostic Tools page within Troubleshooting provides a convenient way to
test network connections using a ping utility, a trace route (tracert) function, and an Nmap
network discovery tool. Also, generate a log file to send to Extron support staff to aid in
troubleshooting problems with the unit or the system.
To open this page, click the Troubleshooting tab at the top of the embedded web pages
and then click the Diagnostic Tools tab on the second tier of tabs (see figure 86).

Figure 86. Troubleshooting Tab, Diagnostic Tools Sub-tab

The Diagnostic Tools page opens (see figure 87).

Figure 87. Diagnostic Tools

For further information about the Diagnostic Tools page, see the SMP 300 Series
Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 101

System Resets
The System Resets page within Troubleshooting contains options to initiate a unit
reboot, delete all stored content and format the internal storage, or perform one of five
different types of reset. Some of the reset options offered here can also be performed using
SIS commands or the front panel menu.
To open this page, click the Troubleshooting tab at the top of the embedded web pages
and then click the System Resets tab on the second tier of tabs (see figure 88).

Figure 88. Troubleshooting Tab, System Resets Sub-tab

The System Resets page opens to the Reset panel (see figure 89).

Figure 89. System Resets Page

Each option within this page includes a description of its function. To perform a reboot,
reset, or content deletion (storage reformatting), click the button for the desired option.
When a reset or reboot is performed, the unit reboots and loses its network connection.
NOTES:
• After a reset or reboot, it may take a few minutes for the SMP to restart and
connect to the network. Refresh the browser window to reconnect to the unit.
• When you select Reset IP Networking Settings or Factory Reset, all IP
addresses and network settings are reset to factory defaults. You must connect
again using the default addresses.
• The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have been set to
the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the passwords
convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and Roles on page 86
to change a password).
For information about resets, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 102

Mirroring LinkLicense
If the SMP has been upgraded with the Horizontal Video Mirroring LinkLicense, the web UI
will have a Mirroring LinkLicense tab. The Mirror LinkLicense page has two panels:
Recording Settings, and Horizontal Video Mirroring Settings that are used to
configure the SMP for one button recording.
To open this page, click the Mirroring LinkLicense tab at the top of the embedded web
pages (see figure 90).

Figure 90. Mirroring LinkLicense Tab

The Mirroring LinkLicense page opens with two expandable panels (see figure 91).

Figure 91. Mirror LinkLicense Page

The panels in the Mirror LinkLicense page are:
1 Recording Settings —
• Set the delay time to start recording after the record command has been issued
(default is 5 seconds).
• Set the minimum recording time on a recording destination (default is 5 minutes).
2 Horizontal Video Mirroring Settings — Enable Horizontal Video Mirroring
for one or more inputs. This feature shows the video or stream as a reflected image on
the central vertical axis, as the SMP flips the video horizontally, to allow the notes to be
displayed correctly, if the presenter is standing behind a glass marker board, facing the
camera to address the audience while writing notes on the board.
For detailed information on configuring the Mirroring LinkLicense page settings, see
the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 103

FlexOS Applications

This section provides basic instructions on how to use each supplemental plug-in
application (app) available for the SMP 300 Series.
When an app is downloaded and installed, a user must have administrator privileges to
access the Advanced Features page and to use the applications. The apps are available
on the SMP 300 Series product page at www.extron.com.

Optional Applications

Digital I/O Configurator

This application allows the user to first configure and label the digital input/output (I/O) ports
and then create up to 16 different monitors that check for conditions and apply actions
when the conditions are met.

Figure 92. Configure Digital I/O Dialog Box

NOTE: Pull-up resistors are often used with buttons and switches that are wired as
contact closures to ground. With a pull-up resistor, the input pin reads a high state
when the button is not pressed (the circuit is open). When the button is pressed, it
connects the input pin directly to ground, and the input pin reads a low state.

TIPS: Here are some guidelines on when to select one of the pull-up modes.
• Input with pull-up — Enable the pull-up resistor if the external device does not
have the capability or is not configured to drive the SMP digital input above the
minimum logic high threshold (such as when connected to a switch contact closure
to ground, or when a digital output drives an open collector or drain).
• Output with pull-up — Enable the pull-up resistor if the load requires that a logic
high signal be driven from the source (the SMP) (when the load does not have its
own internal pull-up resistor, for example). Pull-ups do not need to be used when
driving loads that require only contact closure to ground (when controlling an Extron
IPL T PC1, for example).

SMP 300 Series • Flex I/O Applications 104

Kaltura
This optional application enables scheduling, RTMP streaming, and publishing directly
to Kaltura KMC. The Kalutua app requires firmware v3.00 or newer. Scheduling and
RTMP/RTMPS streaming to Kaltura KMC are enabled by Enhanced Kaltura Features
LinkLicense.

iCalendar
This optional application enables ingesting periodic schedules from Outlook, Google
Calendar, and other shceduing servies. The iCalendar app requires firmware v3.01 or newer.

Panopto
This optional application enables importing Panopto Schedules and file publishing
to Panopto. The Panopto app requires firmware v3.00 or newer. Scheduling and
RTMP/RTMPS streaming to Panopto are enabled by Enhanced Panopto Features
LinkLicense.
Full instructions for loading and using FlexOS applications in the web-based user interface,
are available in the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Flex I/O Applications 105

Remote
Communication and
Control

This section describes Simple Instruction Set (SIS) command programming and control of
the SMP 300 Series, including:
• Connection Options
• Host-to-device Communications
• Using the Command and Response Tables
• Command and Response Tables

Connection Options
The SMP 300 Series can be configured and controlled using SIS commands or embedded
web pages. Configure and control the SMP 300 Series remotely via a host computer or
other device (such as a control system) by connecting to the rear panel RS‑232 port, LAN
port, or the front panel USB Config port of the SMP device.

RS-232 Port
The SMP 300 Series has a rear panel serial port (see figure 4, E on page 15) that
can be connected to a host device such as a computer running a HyperTerminal utility,
or the Extron DataViewer utility. The port makes serial control of the SMP possible. Use
the protocol information listed below to make the connection (see Host-to-device
Communications on page 108).
RS-232 protocol defaults:
• 9600 baud • no parity • 1 stop bit
• 8 data bits • no flow control

Front Panel Configuration Port

The mini B USB port is located on the front panel (see figure 8, B on page 21). Connect
to a host computer for configuration using SIS commands with DataViewer, available at
www.extron.com. To connect the SMP 300 Series to a host computer, download the USB
driver, follow the on-screen instructions, and configure the SMP as required.
NOTE: If an Extron USB device has never been connected to the host computer, prior
to connecting the SMP 300 Series config (USB) port for the first time, you must install
and activate the USB driver. The simplest way to do this is to install DataViewer (see
DataViewer on page 141).

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 106

Ethernet (LAN) Port
The rear panel LAN connector (see figure 4, Q on page 15) on the device can be
connected to an Ethernet LAN or WAN. Communication between the device and the control
system or PC is via Telnet (a TCP socket using port 23). The Telnet port can be changed, if
necessary, via SIS or using the SMP 300 Series web UI. This connection makes SIS control
of the device possible using a control system or PC connected to the same LAN or WAN.
LAN port defaults:
• DHCP: off
• SMP 300 Series IP address: 192.168.254.254
• Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
• Gateway IP address: 0.0.0.0

Ethernet Connection
The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover cable and
must be properly terminated for your application.
• Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the SMP.
• Patch (straight) cable — Connection of the SMP to an Ethernet LAN.
Pins:
12345678 Crossover Cable Straight-through Cable
(for direct connection to a PC) (for connection to a switch, hub, or router)
End 1 End 2 End 1 End 2
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
1 white-orange 1 white-green 1 white-orange 1 white-orange
2 orange 2 green 2 orange 2 orange
3 white-green 3 white-orange 3 white-green 3 white-green
4 blue 4 blue 4 blue 4 blue
5 white-blue 5 white-blue 5 white-blue 5 white-blue
6 green 6 orange 6 green 6 green
7 white-brown 7 white-brown 7 white-brown 7 white-brown
8 brown 8 brown 8 brown 8 brown
Insert Twisted
Pair Wires T568B T568A T568B T568B
A cable that is wired as TIA/EIA T568A at one A cable wired the same at both ends is called
RJ-45 end and T568B at the other (Tx and Rx pairs a "straight-through" cable because no pin/pair
Connector reversed) is a "crossover" cable. assignments are swapped.

Figure 93. RJ-45 Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments

To establish a network connection to the SMP:

1. Open a TCP socket to port 23 using the SMP 300 Series IP address.
NOTE: If the local system administrators have not changed the value, the
factory‑specified default, 192.168.254.254, is the correct value for this field.
2. The SMP responds with a copyright message including the name of the product,
firmware version, part number, and the current date and time.
3. The device is password protected, enter the appropriate name, admin or user and
password.
NOTE: The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have
been set to the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the
passwords convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and Roles
on page 86 to change a password).

a. If the password is accepted, the device responds with Login User or Login
Administrator.
b. If the password is not accepted, the Password prompt returns.

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 107

 Connection Timeouts
The Ethernet link times out after a designated period of time with no communication. By
default, this timeout value is 5 minutes, but the value can be changed.
NOTE: Extron recommends leaving the default timeout at 5 minutes and periodically
issuing the Query (Q) command to keep the connection active. If there are long idle
periods, disconnect the socket and reopen the connection when another command
must be sent.

Verbose Mode
Telnet connections can be used to monitor for changes that occur, such as SIS commands
from other Telnet sockets or serial port changes. For a Telnet session to receive change
notices, the Telnet session must be in verbose mode 1 or 3. In verbose mode 1 or 3, the
Telnet socket reports changes in messages that resemble SIS command responses. Front
panel changes are also sent to users who are in verbose mode.

Host-to-device Communications
SIS commands consist of one or more characters per command field. They do not require
special characters to begin or end the command sequence. Each response to an SIS
command ends with a carriage return and a line feed (CR/LF = ]), which signals the end of
the response character string. A string is one or more characters.
NOTE: SSH connections may add an extra line feed in the final terminator SIS
responses, for example, standard is X1!] and SSH is X1!}].

SMP 300 Series-initiated Messages

The SMP 300 Series initiates messages under specific conditions. No response is required
from the host. The SMP 300 Series initiated messages are listed here.
]© Copyright 2014-2022, Extron Electronics, SMP 351, Vn.nn, 60– 1324-01]
Day, DD MMM YYYY HH:MM:SS]
or
]© Copyright 2014-2022, Extron Electronics, SMP 351 3G‑SDI, Vn.nn,
60– 1324-02]
Day, DD MMM YYYY HH:MM:SS]
or
]© Copyright 2014-2022, Extron Electronics, SMP 352, Vn.nn, 60–1634-11]
Day, DD MMM YYYY HH:MM:SS]
or
]© Copyright 2014-2022, Extron Electronics, SMP 352 3G-SDI, Vn.nn,
60–1634-12]
Day, DD MMM YYYY HH:MM:SS]
Vn.nn is the firmware version number.

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 108

 The SMP sends the copyright messages under the following circumstances:
• If the SMP is off and an RS-232 connection is already set up (the PC is cabled to
the SMP and a serial communication program such as HyperTerminal is open), the
connected unit sends these messages via RS-232 when first powered on.
• If the SMP is on, it sends the copyright messages when a Telnet connection to the
SMP is first opened. The day of the week, date, and time are shown when the SMP is
connected via Telnet, but not via RS-232. If using a Telnet connection, the copyright
message, date, and time is followed by a password prompt.

Password Information
NOTE: The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have been set
to the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the passwords
convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and Roles on page 86 to
change a password).
The ]Password: prompt requires a password (administrator level or user level) followed by
a carriage return. The prompt is repeated if the correct password is not entered.
If the correct password is entered, the unit responds with ] Login Administrator ] or
] Login User ], depending on the password entered. If passwords are the same for both
administrator and user, the unit defaults to administrator privileges.

Error Responses
When the SMP is unable to execute the command, it returns an error response to the host.
The error response codes and their descriptions are as follows:
E10 – Unrecognized command E18 – System timed out
E12 – Invalid port number E22 – Busy
E13 – Invalid parameter (number is out of range) E24 – Privilege violation
E14 – Not valid for this configuration E26 – Maximum connections exceeded
E17 – Invalid command for signal type E28 – Bad file name or file not found

Using the Command and Response Tables

The Command and Response Tables begins on page 114. Symbols used in the table
represent variables in the command and response fields. Command and response examples
are shown throughout the table. The SIS commands are not case sensitive. The ASCII to Hex
conversion table below is for use with the command and response table.
ASCII to Hex Conversion Table
Space
•

Figure 94. ASCII to Hex Conversion

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 109

Symbol definitions X2@ = Priority status for receiving timeouts —
] = CR/LF (carriage return/line feed) 0 = Use Send data string command parameters (if
they exist) (default).
} = Carriage return 1 = Use Configure receive timeout command
or | or pipe symbol (no line feed, hex = 0D) parameters instead.
• = Space X2# = Verbose mode
0 = Clear/none (default for Telnet connections)
E = Escape
1 = Verbose mode (default for USB and RS‑232 host
or W control)
X! = Inputs 1 to 4 (1 to 5 for SDI models) 2 = Tagged responses for queries
3 = Verbose mode and tagged responses for queries
X* = Status
0 = Offline X2$ = Temperature — Degrees in Celsius (example: xx.xC)
1 = Live X2% = RS-232 baud rate (9600 [default], 19200, 38400,
X( = 0 = Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default) 57600, 115200)
1 = Enabled/assigned/on/muted X2^ = RS-232 parity — single letter:
X1) = Configuration type Odd, Even, None (default), Mark, Space
0 = IP Config (ip.cfg) X2& = RS-232 data bits — 7, 8 (default)
2 = Box specific parameters (box.cfg)
X2* = RS-232 stop bits — 1 (default), 2
X1! = Firmware version number
X2( = Input mode
X1@ = Device name (63 characters, max) 0 = Off
Must comply with internet host name standards. 1 = ES RTP Push
X1# = Day, date, and time (Day,•MM•DD•YY‑HH:MM:SS) 2 = RTSP Pull
X1$ = Time zone acronym (2 to 6 letters) X3) = Audio format
0 = Disable audio
X1% = Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) offset value: -12:00 1 = Analog (default of input 3)
to 14:00. Represents hours and minutes (HH:MM) 2 = LPCM 2 CH (default)
offset from GMT including the time zone name.
X3! = Authentication type
X1^ = IP address in dotted decimal notation 0 = Off
(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) 1 = Basic
Default: 192.168.254.254 (no padding) 2 = Digest
Default gateway IP address: 0.0.0.0
Default DNS server IP address: 0.0.0.0 X3@ = Connection status
0 = NA
X1& = Subnet mask 1 = Disconnected
Default: 255.255.0.0 (no padding) 2 = Connected
X1* = Hardware MAC address X3# = Password — Maximum length 128 characters. All
(00-05-A6-NN-NN-NN) alpha-numeric characters permitted except |, and
X1( Time in tens of milliseconds to wait for characters "space".
coming into a serial port before terminating (min =
0, max = 32767 and, default = 10 = 100 ms). The NOTE: The factory configured passwords
response is returned with leading zeros. for all accounts on this device have been
set to the device serial number. In the
X2) Time in tens of milliseconds to wait between
characters coming into a serial port before event of a complete system reset, the
terminating (min = 0, max = 32767, and default = passwords convert to the default, which
2 = 20 ms). The response is returned with leading is no password.
zeros. Commands using both X1& and X2) must
have both values = 0 or both set to non‑zero. X4) = Encode profile
1 = Base
X2! = Parameter to set either Length of message to 2 = Main
receive or Delimiter value. L=#=byte count (min = 0, 3 = High
max = 32767, default = 0L = 0 byte count).
D = Decimal value for ASCII character (min = 0, max X4! = Output mode
= 00255, default = 00000L). Value is placed prior to 1 = Video and audio
parameter: 3 byte length = 3L and ASCII 0A delimiter 2 = Video only
is 10D. X4@ = Bit rate control type
The parameter is case sensitive, and must use 0 = VBR (default)
capital D or capital L. The response is returned with 1 = CVBR
leading zeros. 2 = CBR
X4# = Video bit rate — 200 to 10000

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 110

X4$ = Audio bit rate — 80, 96, 128, 192, 256, 320 X50$ = Input video format
X4% = GOP length — 1 to 300 1 = YUVp / HDTV (default)
X4^ = Record resolution 2 = YUVi
1 = 480p 3 = Composite
2 = 720p 4 = 3G-SDI
3 = 1080p 5 = HD-SDI
4 = WCIF (512x288)
5 = XGA (1024x768) 6 = SDI
6 = SXGA (1280x1024) 7 = Auto-SDI (Input 5 default)
99 = Custom X50% = Stream name — Up to 16 alphanumeric characters,
X4& = Record frame rate a hyphen (-), or underscore (_)
1 = 30 5 = 12.5 X50^ = Audio selection
2 = 25 6 = 12 40000 = Analog Input A (Left)
3 = 24 7 = 10 40001 = Analog Input A (Right)
4 = 15 8=5 40002 = Digital input A (Left)
X4* = Output refresh rate 40003 = Digital input A (Right)
1 = 60 Hz (default) 40004 = Analog Input B (Left)
2 = 50 Hz 40005 = Analog Input B (Right)
40006 = Digital input B (Left)
X4( = Aspect ratio
40007 = Digital input B (Right)
01 = Fill (the input automatically fills the entire output 60000 = Output (Left, for audio mute control only)
raster; default) 60001 = Output (Right, for audio mute control only)
02 = Follow (the input is displayed in its native X50& = Audio level in 0.1 dB steps —
aspect ratio) -180 to 240 = -18.0 to +24.0 dB
03 = Fit (the input is zoomed in to fill the entire
X51) = Overscan
output raster while maintaining its aspect ratio)
0 = 0 % (default = HDMI inputs)
X5! = Executive mode: 1 = 2.5 % (default: YUVp input)
0 = Off (default) 2 = 5.0 % (default: YUVi and composite inputs)
1 = Complete lockout (no front panel control)
X51! = HDCP status
2 = Menu lockout (menu only)
0 = No sink/source detected
3 = Allow recording controls only
1 = HDCP detected,
X6$ = HDMI output 2 = Sink/source detected but no HDCP
0 = Channel A full screen
X51@ = HDCP notification
1 = Channel B full screen
0 = Off (mute output to black)
2 = Confidence layout
1 = On (green HDCP notification-screen, default)
X6& = EDID user location (1, 2, and 3) X51$ = Input name, up to 16 characters —
X6* = EDID resolution (see EDID table on page 42) Default = Input X where X is the input number
X6( = Port timeout in tens of seconds 1 to 65000 (zero X52( = Json string of recording profile parameters
padded. Default: 00030 = 300 seconds) (for example:{“id”:1,“name”:“RECORD
PROFILE01, “contributor”:“Contributor1,
X10) = Default name — Combination of model name and
“coverage”:Coverage1”...}
last three pairs of MAC address
(for example: SMP-351-07-8C-EC) X53) = User/Encoder/Layout Preset number —
1 to 32 (two-digit response — 0 padding)
X50) = Stream selection
1 = Archive Channel A X53! = Preset name — Up to 16 characters
2 = Archive Channel B (Available for Dual Mode only) X53@ = Input preset number — 1 to 128
3 = Confidence
4 = Virtual input 1 re-stream X53# = Streaming preset — 1 to 16
5 = Virtual input 2 re-stream (two-digit response — 0 padding)
X50! = Input number 1 to 5
1 or 2 digit command, Two-digit response
X50@ = Output channel
1 = A (input 1 and 2)
2 = B (input 3, 4, and 5)
X50# = Encoding mode
0 = Composite mode
1 = Dual channel mode

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 111

X53* = Metadata parameter X56$ = Audio delay — 0 to 999 ms
0 = Contributor
X56% = Test patterns (0 to 8)
1 = Coverage
0 = Off (default)
2 = Presenter 1 = Color bars
3 = Date (view only) 2 = Aspect ratio 1.33
4 = Description 3 = Aspect ratio 1.78
5 = Format 4 = Aspect ratio 1.85
6 = Identifier (view only) 5 = Crop
7 = Language 6 = Pulse
8 = Publisher 7 = Timestamp (Composite mode only)
9 = Relation 8 = Universal OSD (Composite mode only)
10 = Rights X56^ = RTMP URL (string)
11 = Source
12 = Subject X56& = Audio output
13 = Title 1 = Ch A
2 = Ch B
14 = Type
3 = Ch A + Ch B
15 = SystemName (view only) 4 = Ch A + Ch B (Analog dual mono enabled only)
16 = Course 5 = Ch B (Analog dual mono enabled only)
X53( = Metadata value — 127 character maximum X58! = Front panel audio level indication
X54) = Recording status -1500 to 0
0 = Stop Full bars = 0
1 = Start No bars = <-600
2 = Pause Format: left*right
Example: -58*-63
X54! = Recorder time in minutes — 1 to 60
X58@ = Recording mode
X54@ = Recording destination 0 = Channel A disabled
auto 1 = Single Recording in Composite mode
internal 2 = Internal + Secondary Recording in Composite
usbfront mode
usbrear
X59! = USB Storage
usbrcp
0 = All USB storage
N/A 2 = USBFront
X54# = File size (in megaBytes) 3 = USBRear
4 = USBRCP
X54$ = 0 = Recording disabled
1 = Single recording enabled X59@ = Valid DB_ID number (integer)
2 = Dual recording enabled X59# = Delay duration in seconds — 5 to 60.
X54% = Thumbnail size
X59% = Virtual inputs — 1 = input 1, 2 = input 2
0 = Normal (default)
1 = Follows archive resolution X59^ = RTSP stream URL
X54^ = Recorder status X60# = Pixel phase adjustment — 0 to 63 (default = 32)
stopped
X60$ = Horizontal and vertical start — 0 to 255
recording (default = 128)
paused
X60% = Total pixels — Up to + 512 of the default value for
X55! = Video Output Frame Rate the detected rate
1 = 30 Hz 5 = 12.5 Hz X60^ = Active lines — Up to + 256 of the default value for
2 = 25 Hz 6 = 12 Hz the detected resolution (range varies based on input
resolution)
3 = 24 Hz 7 = 10 Hz
X60& = Active pixels — Up to + 512 of the default value for
4 = 15 Hz 8 = 5 Hz
the detected resolution (range varies based on input
X56) = Destination resolution)
0 = Auto
X60* = Picture adjust — 0 to 127 (default = 64)
1 = Internal
2 = USBFront X60( = Horizontal centering — Varies based on archive
3 = USBRear resolution
4 = USBRCP X61! = Vertical centering — Varies based on archive
11 = Internal + Auto resolution
12 = Internal + USBFront X61@ = Horizontal size — 120 to 4096
13 = Internal + USBRear
14 = Internal + USBRCP X61# = Vertical size — 64 to 4096
X56# = Encoder Presets — 1 to 32

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 112

X62! = SNMP contact name text, up to 64 characters
(default = Not Specified)
X62@ = SNMP location, up to 64 characters
(default = Not Specified)
X62# = SNMP public community string, up to 64 characters
(default = public)

NOTE: SNMP names and community strings

can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters
including hyphens, underscores and periods.

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 113

Command and Response Tables
Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Information Requests

NOTE: An asterisk (*) after the version number indicates the currently running version. Question marks (?.??) indicate that only factory firmware is
loaded. A caret (^) indicates the firmware version that should be running, but a Mode 1 reset Rear Panel Reset on page 19 was executed and
the default factory firmware is running. An exclamation point (!) indicates corrupted firmware. These apply to 0Q-4Q.

Firmware version Q or 1Q X1!] Firmware version to 2 decimal

places (1.00).
Firmware and build *Q/q X1!] Firmware version to 2 decimal
version places plus build number to 4
decimal places (1.12.1234).
Verbose version info 0Q Sum of 2Q-3Q-4Q] Show bootstrap, factory-installed,
and updated firmware version.
Bootstrap Version 2Q X1! ] The bootstrap firmware is
not user replaceable, but you
may need this information for
troubleshooting.
Factory firmware version 3Q X1! plus Web ver.-desc-UL date/ Factory installed firmware is not
time] user replaceable. This firmware
Example: 1.00.0000-b2325(1.81LX-SMP 351 is the version the SMP reverts to
-Sat, 01 Nov 2014 20:10 UTC)] after a mode 1 reset.
Updated firmware 4Q X1! plus Web ver.-desc-UL date/ Use this command to find out
version time] which version of firmware has
Example: 1.00.0004-b2635*(1.81LX-SMP 351 been uploaded into the SMP 300
-Sun, 02 Nov 2014 00:12 UTC)] Series.
View temperature of the E 20STAT} X2$]
unit Verbose mode 2/3 20Stat X2$]
KEY: X1! = Firmware version number
X2$ = Temperature Degrees in Celsius (example: xx.xC)

Query part number N 60-1324-01] SMP 351

60-1324-02] SMP 351 3G-SDI
60-1324-11] SMP 351 400GB SSD
60-1324-12] SMP 351 3G-SDI/ 400GB SSD
60-1634-11] SMP 352
60-1634-12] SMP 352 3G-SDI
Query model name 1I Example: SMP•351] SMP 351, SMP 351 3G-SDI,
SMP 352, or SMP 352 3G-SDI
Query model description 2I Streaming•Media•Processor ]
Query system memory 3I #Bytes used out of #KBytes]
usage
Query serial number 99I Example: A13VE3R] Returns the serial number.
Query MAC address 98I Returns one or more MAC
Example: 00:05:A6:HH:HH:HH] addresses in a colon separated
string.
Query LinkLicense E LELIC} Dual Recording Upgrade, If license not installed, returns
79-2547-XX]] ]].
If multiple license are installed,
each displays on a separate line
with ]] after the last license.
Query number of 10I N] Number of users.
connected users
Query system processor 11I NN] Returns a percentage of total.
usage
Query system processor 12I NN] Returns a percentage of total.
idle

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 114

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Information Requests (continued)
Query eth0 link status 13I Current link state (up/down)* speed in MB (10/100/1000)* mode
(full/half)].
Query file transfer config 38I Example: \\Network_Storage\Folder, cifs].
Query selected input 42I ChA<In#>*<input name>*<input resolution>*<frame
status rate>*<1/0>,ChB<In#>*<input name>*<input
resolution>*<frame rate>*<1/0>]
Example: ChA1*Input1Name*1920x1080*60*1,ChB3*Input3Name*
720x480*60*1]
ChA*Input1Name*n/a*n/a*0,ChB4*Input4Name*
Example:
1920x1080*50*1]
Query Archive/ChA 43I <DefaultPreset#>*<DefaultPresetName>,
encoder presets <SelectedPreset#>*<SelectedPresetName>]
Query CHB encoder 44I <DefaultPreset#>*<DefaultPresetName>,
presets (Dual Channel <SelectedPreset#>*<SelectedPresetName>]
only)
Query Confidence 45I <DefaultPreset#>*<DefaultPresetName>,
encoder presets <SelectedPreset#>*<SelectedPresetName>]
Example: 3*720 High,1*1080p High]
Example: 3*720 High,0*modified,not saved]
Query Archive/ChA 46I <SelectedPreset#>*<SelectedPresetName>]
streaming presets
Query ChB streaming 47I <SelectedPreset#>*<SelectedPresetName>]
presets
Query Confidence 48I <SelectedPreset#>*<SelectedPresetName>]
streaming presets
Example: 3*RTMPYouTube]
Example: 0*modified,not saved]
Query layout preset 49I <DefaultPreset#>*<DefaultPresetName>,
<SelectedPreset#>*<SelectedPresetName>]
Example: 3*PBP Mid LFT,7*Side By Side]
Storage Info
Query internal 55I Internal*<used>*<total>*free>*<recording_time>
*<active>]
Query front USB 56I <name>*<used>*<total>*free>*<recording_time>*
<active>,<name>*<used>*<total>*free>*
<recording_time>*<active>...]
Query rear USB 57I <name>*<used>*<total>*free>*<recording_time>*
<active>,<name>*<used>*<total>*free>*
<recording_time>*<active>...]
Query RCP USB 58I <name>*<used>*<total>*free>*<recording_time>*
<active>,<name>*<used>*<total>*free>*
<recording_time>*<active>...]

NOTES:
• For all USB ports, each new <name> field signifies a new partition on that USB drive, and are separated by a comma (,).
• For the <active> field, the device will respond with 0, 1, or 2: 0 = not active, 1 = single recording active, 2 = secondary recording active.
Query installed FlexOS 60I <app name>*<ver#>*<enable/disable>] run state enable = 1
app or apps (firmware <app name>*<ver#>*<enable/disable>] run state disable = 0
v3.00 or newer) <app name>*<ver#>*<enable/disable>]]

Example: Digital I/O*2.08.0013*0]

Panopto*1.00.0002*1]]
Sync Schedule
Trigger schedule sync ESTRGR} TrgrS] Sync with schedule (return error
code if scheduling is off or not
supported)
Unsolicited response TrgrS] Schedule is refreshed.

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 115

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Remove Schedule
Remove scheduled EXTRGR} TrgrX] All future recording events are
recording events removed from the unit.
Unsolicited response TrgrX] Schedule is refreshed.
Clear Alarms
Clear active alarms ECALRM} Alrm C] Clear all active alarms.
View active alarms 39I [name:alarm_name],[level:alarm_level]...]]
If no active alarms None active]
Name Unit
Set unit name E X1@ CN } Ipn X1@ ]
Set unit name to default E • CN} Ipn X10) ]
View unit name E CN } X1@ ]
View Telnet connections E CC} N] N = Number of active IP
Verbose mode 2/3 Icc N] connections.
Set verbose mode E X2# CV} Vrb X2#]
View verbose mode E CV} X2#]
NOTE: If tagged responses is enabled, all read commands return the data, the same as setting the value does.

KEY: X1@ = Unit name Unit name is a text string of up to 63 characters from the alphabet (A-Z), digits (0-9),
and the minus sign/hyphen (-). The first character must be an alpha character. The last
character must not be a minus.
X2# = Verbose mode 0 = Clear/none (default for Telnet connections)
1 = Verbose mode (default for USB and RS-232 host control)
2 = Tagged responses for queries
3 = Verbose mode and tagged responses for queries (Example: command: E CV} Response: Vrb3 ])
X10) = Default name Combination of model name and last three pairs of MAC address (Example: SMP-351-07-8C-EC)

System Commands
Backup/Restore
Save configuration E 1* X1) XF} Cfg1* X1) ] Save configuration to file
location (/nortxe-backup).
Restore configuration E 0* X1) XF} Cfg0* X1) ] Load configuration from file
location (/nortxe-backup).

KEY: X1) = Configuration type 0 = IP config (ip.cfg), 2 = Box specific parameters (box.cfg)

Resets
Reboot system E 1BOOT} Boot1] Complete system reboot.
Restart the network E 2BOOT} Boot2]
Reset flash E ZFFF} Zpf] Reset flash memory
(excludes recording files).
System reset (factory E ZXXX} Zpx] Resets device to default and
defaults) deletes recorded files.
Reset all device settings E ZY} Zpy] Reset to default except IP
and delete recording files address, delete all user and
recorded files
NOTE: This reset excludes IP settings such as IP address, subnet mask, gateway IP address, unit name, DHCP setting and port mapping (Telnet/
web/direct access) in order to preserve communication with the device.

Absolute reset E ZQQQ} Zpq] Same as System Reset, plus

returns the IP address and
subnet mask to defaults.

NOTE: The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have been set to the device serial number. In the event of a complete
system reset, the passwords convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and Roles on page 86 to change a password).

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 116

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Port Assignment
NOTES:
• Duplicate port# assignments are not permitted (for example, the Telnet and web port assignment cannot be the same) and E13 error is
returned.
• Remapping of port# assignments must be to ports 1024 or higher (unless resetting to the default port number or disabling the port by setting it
to 0).

Telnet Port
Set Telnet port map E [port#]MT } Pmt[port#]]
Reset Telnet port map E  23MT } Pmt 00023 ] Reset the Telnet port to the
default value (23).
Disable Telnet port E  0MT } Pmt 00000 ]
View Telnet port map E  MT } [port#]]
Web Port
Set web port map E [port#]MH } Pmh[port#]]
Reset web port map E  80MH } Pmh 00080 ] Reset the web port to the
default value (80).
Disable web port E  0MH } Pmh 00000 ]
View web port map E  MH } [port#]]
SNMP Port
Set SNMP port map E  A[port#]PMAP } Pmap A[port#]]
Reset SNMP port map E  A 161PMAP } Pmap A 00161 ] Reset the SNMP port to the
default value (161).
Disable SNMP port E  A 0PMAP } Pmap A 00000 ]
View SNMP port map E  A PMAP } [port#]]
SSH (SIS) Port
Set SSH port map E  B[port#]PMAP } Pmap B[port#]]
Reset SSH port map E  B 22023PMAP } Pmap B 22023 ] Reset the SSH port to the
default value (22023).
Disable SSH port E  B 0PMAP } Pmap B 00000 ]
View SSH port map E  B PMAP } [port#]]
SSL Port
Set SSL port map E  S[port#]PMAP } Pmap S[port#]]
Reset SSL port map E  S 443PMAP } Pmap S 00443 ] Reset the SSL port to the
default value (443).
Disable SSL port E  S 0PMAP } Pmap S 00000 ]
View SSL port map E  S PMAP } [port#]]
Echo for SIS over SSH
Enable Echo E  1ECHO } Echo 1] Operate like SSH client.
Disable Echo E  0ECHO } Echo 0] Operate like Telnet (port 23).
View Echo status E  ECHO } X( ] View the Echo setting

KEY: X( = Enable/On or disable/off 0 = Disabled/off (default) 1 = Enabled/on (Returns command entered along with response).

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 117

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
SNMP Unit Contact
Set unit contact E  C X62! SNMP} SnmpC* X62!] Sets the unit contact to X62!.
Set unit contact to E  C • SNMP} SnmpC*Not•Specified] Sets the unit contact to the
default default setting.
View unit contact E  CSNMP} X62!] View the unit contact.

KEY: X62! = SNMP contact name text, up to 64 alphanumeric characters, hyphens, underscores and period

SNMP Unit Location

Set unit location E  L X62@ SNMP} Snmp L* X62@] Sets the unit location to X62@.
Set unit location to E  L•SNMP} SnmpL*Not•Specified] Sets the unit location to the
default default setting.
View unit location E  LSNMP } X62@] View the unit location.

KEY: X62@ = SNMP location, up to 64 alphanumeric characters, hyphens, underscores and period (default = Not Specified).

SNMP Community Strings

Set public community E P X62#SNMP} SnmpP* X62#] Sets public community string
string to X62#.
Set public community E P•SNMP} SnmpP*public] Sets community string to the
string to default default.
View public community E PSNMP} X62#] View the public community
string string.

NOTE: Community strings are referred to as passwords in the web-based user interface.

KEY: X62# = SNMP public community string, up to 64 alphanumeric characters, hyphens, underscores and period (default = public).

SNMP Access Enable

Enable SNMP access E E1SNMP } SnmpE*1] Enable SNMP access.
Disable SNMP access E E0SNMP } SnmpE*0] Disable SNMP access.
View SNMP state E ESNMP } X( ] View the SNMP access setting.

KEY: X( = Enable/disable 0 = Off or disable (default), 1 = On or enable

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 118

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
IP Setup Commands
Set date / time E MM/DD/YY- Ipt •  X1# ] Set the date and time.
HH:MM:SS CT }
View date / time E CT } X1# ] View the date and time.
Set time zone E X1$ * TZON } Tzon • X1$ * X1% ]
Example: E PST * TZON } Tzon • PST*(UTC-08:00/UTC-07:00)•Pacific Time]
View time zone E TZON } X1$* X1% ]
Verbose mode 2/3 Tzon • X1$* X1% ]
Example: PST*(UTC-08:00/UTC-07:00) •Pacific Time]
View all time zones E * TZON } X1$* X1% ] Repeats for all time zones
... Verbose mode 2/3 adds Tzon •
X1$* X1% ]] to beginning of string
Set DHCP on E 1DH } Idh1 ] Sets DHCP to on.
Set DHCP off E 0DH } Idh0 ] Sets DHCP to off.
View DHCP mode E DH } X( ] 0=DHCP off (default)
1=DHCP on.

KEY: X( = On/off 0 = Disabled/off (default), 1 = Enabled/on

X1# = Local date/time Set: MM/DD/YY-HH:MM:SS
Read: day of week, date, month, year HH:MM:SS (for instance; Fri, 21 Jun 2002 10:54:00)
X1$ = Time zone Acronym (2 to 6 letters) Example: PST for Pacific Standard Time
X1% = Time zone offset GMT offset value (– 12:00 to 14:00) representing hours and minutes (HH:MM) local time is offset
from GMT time and includes the time zone name. Example: PST*(UTC-08:00) Pacific Time

Set IP address, subnet E1*X1^*X1&*X1^ CISG} Cisg1*IP/subnet bits*gateway]

mask, gateway

NOTE: The CISG command resets the network immediately without the need for a BOOT command.

View IP address, subnet E 1CISG } IP/subnet bits*gateway ]

mask, gateway Example: 192.168.254.254/16*0.0.0.0]
Set IP address E X1^ CI } Ipi • X1^ ]
View IP address E CI } X1^ ]
View hardware MAC E CH } X1* ] View the hardware MAC
address Iph • X1* ] address of the unit.
Verbose mode 2/3
Set subnet mask E X1& CS } Ips • X1& ]
View subnet mask E CS } X1& ]
Set gateway IP address E X1^ CG } Ipg • X1^ ] Set the gateway IP address.
View gateway IP E CG } X1^ ] View the gateway IP address.
address
Set DNS server IP E X1^ DI } Ipd • X1^ ] Set the DNS server IP address
address (default: 0.0.0.0).
View DNS server IP E DI } X1^ ] View the DNS server IP address.
address

KEY: X1^ = IP Address Default IP address: 192.168.254.254

Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0
Default DNS: 0.0.0.0
X1& = Subnet Mask Default: 255.255.0.0
X1* = Hardware MAC address 00-05-A6-xx-xx-xx

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 119

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
IP Setup Commands (continued)
Set current port timeout E 0 * X6( TC } Pti 0 * X6( ]
View current port E 0 TC } X6( ]
timeout
Set global IP port E 1* X6( TC} Pti1 * X6( ]
timeout
View global IP port E 1 TC} X6( ]
timeout

KEY: X6( = Port timeout In tens of seconds, zero padded 1 to 65000 (default: 00030 = 300 seconds)

RS-232 Port
Configure serial port E1*X2%,X2^,X2&,X2* CP} Cpn 01•Ccp X2%, X2^, X2&, X2*]
parameters
Reset serial port E 1*9600,n,8,1CP } Cpn 01•Ccp X2%, X2^, X2&, X2*]
View serial port settings E 1CP } X2%, X2^, X2&, X2* ]
Set serial port receive E1*X1(*X2)*X2@*X2! CE} Cpn01•CceX1(,X2),X2@,X2! ]
timeout
View serial port receive E 1CE } X1(,X2),X2@,X2! ]
timeout

KEY: X1( = Port timeout Time in tens of milliseconds to wait for characters coming into a serial port before terminating
(min=0, max=32767, default: 10 = 100 ms). The response is returned with leading zeros.
X2) = Intercharacter timeout Time in tens of milliseconds to wait between characters coming into a serial port before terminating
(min=0, max=32767. Default: 2 = 20 ms). The response is returned with leading zeros. Commands using
both X1( and X2) must have both values = 0 or both set to non-zero.
X2! = Primary port status Parameter to set either the Length of message to receive, or the Delimiter value.
L=#=byte count (min=0, max=32767. Default=0L=0 byte count).
D = decimal value for ASCII character. (min=0, max=00255. Default=00000L).
Value is placed prior to parameter: 3 byte length = “3L” and ASCII 0A delimiter is “10D”. The parameter is
case sensitive, must use capital D or capital L. The response is returned with leading zeros.
X2@ = Length delimiter Priority status for receiving timeouts: 0 = Use Send data string command parameters when available,
1 = Use Configure receive timeout command parameters (default = 0).
X2% = RS-232 baud rate 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 baud
X2^ = RS-232 parity Odd, Even, None (default), Mark, Space
X2& = RS-232 data bits 7, 8 (default)
X2* = RS-232 stop bits 1 (default), 2

Front Panel Lock (Executive Mode)

Set Executive mode X5! X Exe X5!]
View Executive mode X X5!]

KEY: X5! = Executive mode 0 = Off, 1 = Complete lockout (no front panel control), 2 = Menu lockout, 3 = Allow recording controls only

RCP 101 Executive Mode

Executive mode on 99 * 1X Exe99*1]
Executive mode off 99 * 0X Exe99 *0 ]
Query status 99 * X X( ]

KEY: X( = On/off 0 = Disabled/off (default), 1 = Enabled/on

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 120

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Password and Security Settings
Set administrator E X3#CA} Ipa• X3#]
password
View administrator E CA} ****] If no password is set, the
password response is ] (no ****).
Reset (clear) E •CA} Ipa•]
administrator password
Set user password E X3#CU} Ipu• X3#]
View user password E CU} ****] If no password is set, the
response is ] (no ****).
Reset (clear) user E •CU} Ipu•]
password
View session security E CK} n] Security level of connection
level 11 = User, 12 = Administrator

NOTE: The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have been set to the device serial number. In the event of a complete
system reset, the passwords convert to the default, which is no password.

KEY: X3# = Password Maximum length 128 characters. All alpha-numeric characters permitted except |, and “space”.

File Commands
Change directory E path/directory/CJ} Dirl path/directory/]
Return to root directory E /CJ} Dirl/]
Up one directory E ..CJ} Dirl path/directory/]
View current directory E CJ} path/directory/]
Erase current directory E /EF } Ddl] Also deletes files inside directory
and included files
Erase current directory E  //EF } Ddl]
and sub-directories
List files from current E  LF } path/filename•date/time•length] filename/date/time/bytes left
directory and below path/filename•date/time•length]
path/filename•date/time•length]
...
space_remaining•Bytes Left]]

NOTE: Folders and files in the /recordings/ folder are read-only and cannot be deleted with /EF command. Recordings can be deleted with the
SIS command Delete Recording Event and Files by DB_ID.

SMP Recording Folder Shared on SMD

Enable folder share E E1 * 1SHRF} ShrfE1*1] Allow SMP Recording folder
share.
Disable folder share E E1 * 0SHRF} ShrfE1 *0 ] Disable SMP Recording folder
share.
Query folder share E E1SHRF} X( ] View folder share status.
setting
Query path E P1SHRF} <SMP IP>:/var/uf/recordings ]
Verbose mode 2/3 ShrfP1*<SMP IP>:/var/uf/recordings ]

KEY: X( = Disable/enable 0 = Disabled (default), 1 = Enabled

Delete Recording Event and Files by DB_ID

Delete recording event E Z X59@RCDR} RcdrZ X59@]
and file

KEY: X59@ = Delete recording by DB_ID Valid DB_ID number (integer)

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 121

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Input Selection
Select input X50!* X50@! In X50!*X50@] Switches channel X50@ to
Example: In 02*01] input X50!. X50! and X50@ are
returned in 2-digit responses.
View selected input X50@! X50!] View the input source X50! for
channel X50@.
Set input 3 format 3* X50$\ Typ 03*X50$]
View input 3 format 3\ X50$]
Set input name E X50!,X51$ NI} Nmi X50!,X51$] Set the input source X50! name
to X51$.
View input name E X50! NI} X51$]
View input selection/ 32I ChA X50!*ChB X50!]
channel

KEY: X50! = Input number 1 to 5

X50@ = Output channel 1 = A (Input 1 and 2), 2 = B (Input 3, 4, and 5)
X50$ = Input video format 1 = YUVp/HDTV (default), 2 = YUVi, 3 = Composite
X51$ = Input name Name (up to 16 characters). Default is "Input X" where "X" is the input number

Input Video Aspect Ratio

Set to fill E  X50!*1ASPR} Aspr X50!*01] Sets input X50! to fill.
Set to follow E  X50!*2ASPR} Aspr X50!*02] Sets input X50! to follow.
Set to fit (zoom) E  X50!*3ASPR} Aspr X50!*03] Sets input X50! to fit.
View aspect setting E  X50!ASPR} X4(]

KEY: X4( = Aspect ratio 01 = Fill (the input automatically fills the entire output raster: default)
02 = Follow (the input is displayed in its native aspect ratio)
03 = Fit (the input is zoomed in to fill the entire output raster while maintaining its aspect ratio)
X50! = Input number 1 to 5

Auto‑Image and Memory

Enable/disable X50!*X(A Img X50!*X(]
Auto‑Image per input
View Auto‑Image X50!*A X(]
Performs Auto‑Image to X50@ A Img X50@] Performs Auto‑Image to the
current output current input selection of output
X50@.
Set Auto Memory on E 1AMEM} Amem1]
Set Auto Memory off E 0AMEM} Amem0]
View Auto Memory E AMEM} X(]

KEY: X( = On/off 0 = Disabled (default), 1 = Enabled

X50! = Input number 1 to 5
X50@ = Output channel 1 = A (Inputs 1 and 2), 2 = B (Inputs 3, 4, and 5)

Video Mute
Mute output to black X50@* 1B Vmt X50@*01] Mute channel X50@ output.
Unmute output X50@* 0B Vmt X50@* 00] Unmute channel X50@ output.
View video mute status X50@B X( ] 00 = Unmuted, 01 = Muted

KEY: X( = Muted/unmuted 0 = Unmuted (default), 1 = Muted

X50@ = Output channel 01 = A, 02 = B

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 122

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Recording
Stop recording E Y0 RCDR} RcdrY0 ]
Start recording E Y1 RCDR} RcdrY1 ]
Pause recording E Y2 RCDR} RcdrY2 ]
View record status E Y RCDR} X54)]
Extend record time E E X54! RCDR} RcdrE X54! ] For scheduled recordings only,
extend by X54! minutes.
Add chapter marker E B RCDR} RcdrB]
Execute swap % Tke] Swap channel A and channel B
positions.
Recording status I <ChA X50! * ChB X50!> * <X54^>*<X54@>*<free space in KBytes> *
(secondary recording <time record> * <time remain>]
disabled)
Recording status I <ChA X50! * ChB X50!>*<X54^>*<internal*X54@>*
(secondary recording <internal free space*external free space> * <time
enabled) record>*<time remain_internal*time external>]

NOTE: For view recording time (35I and 36I) 00:00:00 is displayed when not recording.

View recording 35I HH:MM:SS] Displays 00:00:00 when not

duration/elapsed time recording
of recording Verbose 2/3 mode Inf35*HH:MM:SS]
View record time 36I X54@ • HH:MM:SS] Displays 00:00:00 when not
remaining (secondary recording
recording disabled) Verbose 2/3 mode Inf36*X54@ • HH:MM:SS]
View record time 36I internal  •HH:MM:SS* X54@  •HH:MM:SS]
remaining (secondary
recording enabled) Verbose 2/3 mode: Inf36*internal  •HH:MM:SS* X54@  •HH:MM:SS]
View record destination 37I internal * X54@ ]
(secondary recording
enabled) Verbose 2/3 mode Inf37*internal * X54@ ]
View record destination 37I X54@ ]
(secondary recording
disabled)
Set record destination E D X56) RCDR} RcdrDX56) ] Select record destination for
recording(s).
View record destination E D RCDR} X56)] View recording destination for
next recording.

KEY: X50! = Input number 1 to 5

X50@ = Output channel 1 = A (Input 1 and 2), 2 = B (Input 3, 4, and 5)
X54) = Recording status 0 = Stop, 1 = Record, 2 = Pause
X54! = Time MM (0 to 60 minutes)
X54@ = Recording destination auto, internal, usbfront, usbrear, usbrcp
X54^ = Recorder status stopped, usbfront, usbrear, usbrcp, N/A
X56) = Destination 0 = Auto, 1 = Internal, 2 = USBFront, 3 = USBRear,, 4 = USBRCP,
11 = Internal + Auto, 12 = Internal + USBFront, 13 = Internal + USBRear,
14 = Internal + USBRCP

Audio-only Recording
Enable audio-only E A1 * 1RCDR} RcdrA1 *1]
recording
Disable audio-only E A1 * 0RCDR} RcdrA1 *0 ]
recording
View status E A1RCDR} X( ]

KEY: X( = On/off 0 = Disabled (default), 1 = Enabled

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 123

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
View all recording events
View all events E L RCDR} {"db_id": ,"start":, "identifier":"","creator":"",
"title":"", "state":, "media_present":"", "package":""}]
Example {"db_id": 22, "start": 1582141003, "identifier":
"SMP300DHP-IP207_20200219-193643Z", "creator": "",
"title": "", "state": 11, "media_present": "true",
"package":"/var/internal/SMP300DHP-IP207_20200219-
193643Z"}]
Example {"db_id":1,"start":1630344031,"identifier":"","creator":""
,"title":"","state":11,"media_present":1,"package":"/var/
internal/Adhoc_20210830-172034Z"} }
{"db_id":2,"start":1630344858,"identifier":"","creator":"
","title":"","state":4,"media_present":1,"package":"/var/
internal/Adhoc_20210830-173420Z"} ]

KEY: "State" 0 = SCHEDULE_PENDING - Recording Scheduled, 1 = SCHEDULE_CURRENT - Recording Now

2 = SCHEDULE_PROCESSED - Recording Finalized, 3 = SCHEDULE_FINISHED - Ready to Upload
4 = SCHEDULE_ARCHIVING - Uploading to Server,
5 = SCHEDULE_ARCHIVED - Uploading to Server Complete,
6 = SCHEDULE_ARCHIVE_FAILED - Uploading to Server Failed (retry pending),
8 = SCHEDULE_PACKAGE_DELETED - Recording Deleted (to recover disk space),
9 = SCHEDULE_RECORD_FAILED - Recording Failed (package corrupted),
10 = SCHEDULE_ARCHIVE_NOMETHOD - No Transfer Method Defined,
11 = SCHEDULE_RECORD_SKIPPED - Transfer Skipped,
200 = SCHEDULE_PACKAGE_RESCHED - Transfer Rescheduled (one time)

Metadata commands
Set output metadata E M X53* * X53( RCDR} RcdrM X53* * X53( ]
Example: E M2*ProfessorXRCDR} RcdrM2*ProfessorX]
Query output metadata E M X53* RCDR} X53( ]
Example: E M2 RCDR} ProfessorX]

KEY: X53* = Metadata parameter 0 = Contributor, 1 = Coverage, 2 = Presenter, 3 = Date (view only), 4 = Description, 5 = Format,
6 = Identifier (view only), 7 = Language, 8 = Publisher, 9 = Relation, 10 = Rights, 11 = Source,
12 = Subject, 13 = Title, 14 = Type, 15 = System Name, 16 = Course
X53( = Metadata value Up to 127 alpha-numeric characters. All metadata values are cleared to be ready for the next data. Metadata
cannot be updated once the recording starts. New metadata is applied to the next recording.

Presets
User Presets
Recall user preset 1* X50@* X53). 1Rpr X50@* X53)] Set channel X50@ to preset X53).
Save user preset 1* X50@* X53), 1Spr X50@* X53)]
Set user name E 1* X53) , X53! PNAM } Pnam1* X53) , X53!] Set preset number X53) to
name X53!.
Query user name E 1* X53) PNAM } X53!]
Query user presets 52* X50! # X(1 X(2 X(3... X(16]
Verbose mode 2/3 PreU X50!* X(1 X(2 X(3... X(16]

KEY: X( = On/off 0 = Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), 1 = Enabled/assigned/on/muted

X50! = Input number 1 to 5
X50@ = Output channel 1 = Channel A, 2 = Channel B
X53) = Preset Number 1 to 32
X53! = Preset Name Up to 16 characters

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 124

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Presets continued
Recall Layout Preset (for confidence in Dual Channel mode only)
Recall layout preset 9 * 3* X53). 9Rpr3 *X53)] Recall layout preset to X53) to
confidence encoder in dual
channel mode.

KEY: X53) = User/Encoder/Layout Preset Number 1 to 32

X53! = Preset Name Up to 16 characters

Input Presets
Recall preset 2* X50!* X53@ . 2Rpr X50!* X53@]
Save preset 2* X50!* X53@ , 2Spr X50!* X53@]
Set preset name E 2* X53@ ,X53! PNAM } Pnam2* X53@ , X53!]
View preset name E 2* X53@ PNAM } X53!]
Delete input preset E X2* X53@ PRST } PrstX2*X53@]
Query input presets 51# X(1 X(2 X(3... X(128]
Verbose mode 2/3 PreIX(1 X(2 X(3... X(128]

KEY: X( = On/off 0 = Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), 1 = Enabled/assigned/on/muted

X50! = Input number 1 to 5
X53! = Preset Name Up to 16 characters
X53@ = Input preset number 1 to 128

Layout Presets (for composite mode only)

Save layout preset 7 * X53), 7Spr X53)] Save layout preset to X53).
Recall layout preset 7* X53). 7Rpr X53)] Recall layout preset X53)
including input selections.
Recall layout preset 8* X53). 8Rpr X53)] Recall layout preset X53)
without input selections.
Set preset name E 7* X53) ,X53! PNAM } Pnam7* X53) , X53!] Set X53) to X53!.
Query preset name E 7* X53) PNAM } X53!]
Reset layout preset to E X7 * X53) PRST } PrstX7* X53)] Reset X53) to defaults
defaults
Encoder Presets
Recall preset 4*X50) * X56# . 4Rpr X50) * X56#] Recalls Encoder preset X56# for
X50)
Save preset 4* X50) * X56# , 4Spr X50) * X56#] Saves Encoder preset X56# for
selected channel
Set preset name E 4* X56# ,X51$ PNAM } Pnam4* X56# , X51$] Set encoder preset number
X56# to name X51$.
View encoder preset E 4* X56# PNAM } X51$] View the name of Encoder
name preset X56#.
Reset encoder preset to E X4* X56# PRST } PrstX4*X56#] Clears Encoder preset X56#,
default and sets Encoder preset name
to [unassigned].

KEY: X50) = Streaming encoder 1 = Archive Channel A, 2 = Archive Channel B (Available for Dual Channel only)
3 = Confidence
X51$ = Encoder/Streaming preset name Up to 16 characters
X56# = Encoder presets 1 to 32

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 125

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Stream Name (for RTSP PULL stream)
Set stream name E N X50) * X50%  STRC } StrcN X50) * X50%]
View stream name E N X50) STRC } X50%]
Verbose mode 2/3 StrcN X50) *X50%]

KEY: X50) = Streaming encoder 1 = Archive Channel A, 2 = Archive Channel B (Available for Dual Channel only)
3 = Confidence
X50% = Stream name Up to 16 characters

Streaming Presets
Recall preset 3*X50) * X53) . 3Rpr X50) * X53)] Recalls Streaming preset X53)
for X50).
Save preset 3* X50) * X53) , 3Spr X50) * X53)] Saves Streaming preset X53) for
selected channel.
Set preset name E 3* X53) ,X51$ PNAM } Pnam3* X53) , X51$] Set encoder preset number
X53) to name X51$.
View preset name E 3* X53) PNAM } X51$] View the name of Streaming
preset X53).
Delete or clear preset E X3* X53) PRST } PrstX3*X53)] Clears preset X53), and sets
preset name to [unassigned].

KEY: X50) = Streaming Encoder 1 = Archive Channel A, 2 = Archive Channel B (Available for Dual Channel only)
3 = Confidence, 4 = Virtual input 1 re-stream, 5 = Virtual input 2 re-stream
X51$ = Encoder/Streaming preset name Up to 16 alphanumeric characters, a hyphen (-), or underscore (_)
X53) = Streaming presets 1 to 32 (two digit response — 0 padding)

Virtual Inputs
Virtual Input Authentication Type
Set virtual input E E X59% * X3!  STRM } StrmE X59% * X3!]
authentication type
View virtual input E E X59%  STRM } X3!]
authentication type

KEY: X3! = Authentication type 0 = Off, 1 = Basic, 2 = Digest

X59% = Virtual input 1 = Virtual input 1, 2 = Virtual input 2

RTSP Virtual Input Source

Load media item path E U X59% * X59^  PLYR } PlyrU X59% * X59^]
View current media E U X59% PLYR } X59^]
path Verbose mode 2/3 PlyrU X59% * X59^]

KEY: X59% = Virtual input 1 = Virtual input 1, 2 = Virtual input 2

X59^ = RTSP stream URL

RTSP Virtual Input Username

Set RSTP virtual input E V X59% * <username> PLYR } PlyrV X59% * <username>]
username
View RSTP virtual input E V X59% PLYR } <username>]
username

KEY: X59% = Virtual input 1 = Virtual input 1, 2 = Virtual input 2

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 126

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Virtual Inputs continued
RTSP Virtual Input Password
Set RSTP virtual input E W X59% * <password> PLYR } PlyrW X59%, ****] Returns **** if a password is
password set.
View RSTP virtual input E W X59% PLYR } ****] Returns an empty string if a
password password is not set.
Virtual Input Connection Status
View virtual input E Y X59%  PLYR } X3@]
connection status
Verbose mode 2/3 PlyrY X59% * X3@]

KEY: X3@ = Connection status 0 = N/A, 1 = Disconnected, 2 = Connected

X59% = Virtual input 1 = Virtual input 1, 2 = Virtual input 2

Virtual Input Mode

Set virtual input mode E T X59% *  X2( STRM } StrmT X59% *  X2(]
View virtual input mode E T X59% STRM } X2(]
Virtual Input Multicast IP Address
Set virtual input E A X59% *  <multicast IP>STRM } StrmA X59% * <multicast IP>]
multicast IP address
View virtual input E A X59% STRM } <multicast IP>]
multicast IP address
Virtual Input Push Base Port
Set virtual input Push E P X59% *  <base port#>STRM } StrmP X59% * <base port#>] Base port is the beginning port
base port of the range
View virtual input Push E P X59% STRM } <base port#>]
base port

KEY: X2( = Input mode 0 = Off, 1 = ES RTP Push, 2 = RTSP Pull

X59% = Virtual input 1 = Virtual input 1, 2 = Virtual input 2

Input Adjustments (Input 3 only)

Pixel Phase
Set pixel phase E 3*X60# PHAS} Phas03*X60#] Set input 3 to pixel phase X60#
Increment pixel phase E 3+PHAS} Phas03*X60#] Increment pixel phase of input 3
value
Decrement pixel phase E 3-PHAS} Phas03*X60#] Decrement pixel phase of
value input 3
View value E 3 PHAS} X60#] View pixel phase X60# of input 3

KEY: X60# = Pixel phase 0 to 63 (default: 32)

Total Pixels
Set total pixels value E 3*X60% TPIX} Tpix 03*X60%] Set total pixels (per line) for
input 3 to X60%.
Increment total pixels E 3+TPIX} Tpix 03*X60%] Increment the total pixels X60%
value for input 3 by one pixel.
Decrement total pixels E 3-TPIX} Tpix 03*X60%] Decrement the total pixels X60%
value for input 3 by one pixel.
View total pixels E 3 TPIX} X60%] View total pixels for input 3.

KEY: X60% = Total pixels Up to +512 of the default value for the detected range

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 127

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Input Adjustments (Input 3 only) continued
Horizontal Start
Set horizontal start E 3*X60$ HSRT} Hsrt 03*X60$] Set the horizontal start value for
input 3 to X60$.
Increment horizontal E 3+HSRT} Hsrt 03*X60$] Increment the horizontal start
start value X60$ for input 3 by one
pixel.
Decrement horizontal E 3-HSRT} Hsrt 03*X60$] Decrement the horizontal start
start value X60$ for input 3 by one
pixel.
View horizontal start E 3 HSRT} X60$] View the horizontal start value
X60$ of input 3.

KEY: X60$ = Horizontal and vertical start 0 to 255 (default: 128)

Vertical Start
Set vertical start E 3*X60$ VSRT} Vsrt 03*X60$] Set the vertical start value of
input 3 to X60$.
Increment vertical start E 3+VSRT} Vsrt 03*X60$] Increment the vertical start value
value X60$ for input 3 by one pixel.
Decrement vertical start E 3-VSRT} Vsrt 03*X60$] Decrement the vertical start
value value X60$ for input 3 by one
pixel.
View vertical start E 3 VSRT} X60$] View the vertical start value X60$
of input 3.

KEY: X60$ = Horizontal and vertical start 0 to 255 (default: 128)

Active Pixels
Set active pixels E 3*X60& APIX} Apix03*X60&] Set the active pixels per line for
input 3 to X60&.
Increment active pixels E 3+APIX} Apix03*X60&] Increment the active pixels X60&
for input 3 by one pixel.
Decrement active pixels E 3-APIX} Apix03*X60&] Decrement the active pixels
X60& for input 3 by one pixel.
View active pixels E 3 APIX} X60&] View the active pixels value X60&
of input 3.

KEY: X60& = Active pixels Up to +512 of the default value for the detected resolution

Active Lines
Set active lines E 3*X60^ ALIN} Alin03*X60^] Set active lines for input 3 to
X60^.
Increment active lines E 3+ALIN} Alin03*X60^] Increment the active lines X60^
for input 3 by one pixel.
Decrement active lines E 3-ALIN} Alin03*X60^] Decrement the active lines X60^
for input 3 by one pixel.
View active lines E 3 ALIN} X60^] View the active lines value X60^
of input 3.

KEY: X60^ = Active lines Up to +256 of the default value for the detected resolution

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 128

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Picture Adjustments
Color (NTSC and PAL inputs only)
Specify a value E X50@ *X60*COLR } Colr X50@ *X60*] Sets color level to X60*.
Increment value E  X50@ + COLR } Colr X50@*X60* ] Increments color level.
Decrement value E  X50@ − COLR } Colr X50@*X60* ] Decrements color level.
View E X50@ COLR } X60* ] View current setting.
Tint (NTSC input only)
Specify a value E X50@ *X60* TINT } Tint X50@ *X60* ] Sets tint level to X60*.
Increment value E X50@ + TINT } Tint X50@ *X60* ] Increments tint level.
Decrement value E X50@ − TINT } Tint X50@ *X60* ] Decrements tint level.
View E X50@ TINT } X60* ] View current setting.

KEY: X50@ = Output channel 01 = A, 02 = B

X60* = Picture adjust 000 to 127, default: 064 (3-digit response)

Contrast
Specify a value E  X50@ *X60* CONT } Cont X50@ *X60* ] Sets contrast level to X60*.
Increment value E X50@ + CONT } Cont X50@ *X60* ] Increments contrast level.
Decrement value E X50@ − CONT } Cont X50@ *X60* ] Decrements contrast level.
View E X50@ CONT } X60* ] View current setting.
Brightness
Specify a value E  X50@ *X60* BRIT } Brit X50@ *X60* ] Sets brightness level X60*.
Increment value E X50@ + BRIT } Brit X50@ *X60* ] Increments brightness level.
Decrement value E X50@ − BRIT } Brit X50@ *X60*] Decrements brightness level.
View E X50@ BRIT } X60* ] View current setting.

KEY: X50@ = Output channel 01 = A, 02 = B

X60* = Picture adjust 000 to 127, default: 064 (3-digit response)

Horizontal Centering (for Composite mode only)

Specify a value E 1*X50@ *X60( HCTR } HctrX50@*X60( ] Set horizontal centering to X60(.
Increment value E 1*X50@ + HCTR } Hctr X50@*X60( ] Shift window right.
Decrement value E 1*X50@ − HCTR } Hctr X50@*X60( ] Shift window left.
View E 1*X50@ HCTR } X60( ] View current setting.

KEY: X50@ = Output channel 01 = A, 02 = B

X60( = Horizontal centering The value corresponds to the horizontal position of the left edge of the window. The range varies,
so the window never goes completely off-screen (5-digit response).

Horizontal Size (for Composite mode only)

Specify a value E 1*X50@ *X61@ HSIZ } Hsiz X50@*X61@] Set horizontal size to X61@.
Increment value E 1*X50@ + HSIZ } Hsiz X50@*X61@ ] Increase width of the window.
Decrement value E 1*X50@ − HSIZ } Hsiz X50@*X61@ ] Decrease width of the window.
View E 1*X50@ HSIZ } X61@ ] View current setting.

NOTE: Horizontal centering and horizontal size values are adjusted in multiples of 8. If a value is entered that is not a multiple of 8, the closest
acceptable value is applied and returned.

KEY: X50@ = Output channel 01 = A, 02 = B

X61@ = Horizontal size 00120 to 04096 (5-digit response).

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 129

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Picture Adjustments continued
Vertical Centering (for Composite mode only)
Specify a value E 1*X50@ *X61! VCTR } VctrX50@*X61! ] Set vertical centering X61!.
Increment value E 1*X50@ + VCTR } VctrX50@*X61! ] Shift window down.
Decrement value E 1*X50@ − VCTR } VctrX50@*X61! ] Shift window up.
View E 1*X50@ VCTR } X61! ] View current setting.

KEY: X50@ = Output channel 01 = A, 02 = B

X61! = Vertical centering The value corresponds to the vertical position of the top edge of the window. The range varies, so
the window never goes completely off-screen (5-digit response).

Vertical Size (for Composite mode only)

Specify a value E 1*X50@ *X61# VSIZ } Vsiz X50@*X61# ] Set vertical size (height) to X61#.
Increment value E 1*X50@ + VSIZ } Vsiz X50@*X61#] Increase height of the window.
Decrement value E 1*X50@ − VSIZ } Vsiz X50@*X61# ] Decrease height of the window.
View E 1*X50@ VSIZ } X61# ] View current setting.

NOTE: Vertical centering and vertical size values are adjusted in multiples of 2. If a value is entered that is not a multiple of 2, the closest acceptable
value is applied and returned.

KEY: X50@ = Output channel 01 = A, 02 = B

X61# = Vertical size 00064 to 04096 (5-digit response).

Encoder Settings (Archive Encode and Recording)

Stream Enable/Disable
Stream enable E X50)*X( STRC } StrcX50)*X(] Enable or disable each stream.
View stream status E X50)STRC } X(]

KEY: X( = Enable/disable 0 = Disabled (default), 1 = Enabled

X50) = Stream selection 1 = Archive Channel A, 2 = Archive Channel B (Available for Dual Channel mode only),
3 = Confidence

RTMP (primary) Destination URL/Stream Key

Set RTMP URL EU1*X50)*X56^ RTMP} RtmpU1*X50)*X56^] Enter primary publish URL of
X50).
View RTMP URL EU1*X50) RTMP} X56^] View primary publish URL of
X50).
RTMP (backup) Destination URL/Stream Key
Set RTMP URL EU2*X50)*X56^ RTMP} RtmpU2*X50)*X56^] Enter backup publish URL of
X50).
View RTMP URL EU2*X50) RTMP} X56^] View backup publish URL of
X50).

KEY: X50) = Stream selection 1 = Archive Channel A, 2 = Archive Channel B (Available for Dual Channel mode only),
3 = Confidence
X56^ = RTMP URL (string)

RTMP Stream Enable/Disable

Enable RTMP push EEX50)*X( RTMP} RtmpE X50)*X(] Enable or disable RTMP push
stream stream X50).
View RTMP push EEX50) RTMP} X(] View status of RTMP push
stream stream X50).

KEY: X( = Enable/disable 0 = Disabled (default), 1 = Enabled

X50) = Stream selection 1 = Archive Channel A, 2 = Archive Channel B (Available for Dual Channel mode only),
3 = Confidence

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 130

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Encoder Settings (Archive Encode and Recording) continued
RTMP Stream Status
Query primary RTMP E S1*X50) RTMP} X*] View primary RTMP stream
Status RtmpS1*X50) *X*] status.
Verbose mode 2/3
Query backup RTMP E S2*X50) RTMP} X*] View backup RTMP stream
Status RtmpS2*X50) *X*] status.
Verbose mode 2/3
KEY: X* = Status 0 = Offline, 1 = Live
X( = Enable/disable 0 = Disabled (default), 1 = Enabled
X50) = Stream selection 1 = Archive Channel A, 2 = Archive Channel B (Available for Dual Channel mode only),
3 = Confidence

Auto Reconnect RTMP

Enable auto reconnect E R X50) *1RTMP} RtmpR X50) *1] Default is enabled.
Disable auto reconnect E R X50) *0RTMP} RtmpR X50) *0]
View auto reconnect E R X50) RTMP} X( ]
KEY: X( = Enable/disable 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled (default)
X50) = Stream selection 1 = Archive Channel A, 2 = Archive Channel B (Available for Dual Channel mode only),
3 = Confidence

Enable/Disable Single/Secondary Recording (Composite mode)

Single recording enable E X1*1RCDR } Rcdr X1*1] Enable single recording (internal
or external).
Secondary recording E X1*2RCDR } Rcdr X1*2] Enable secondary recording
enable (internal or external).
Recording disable E X1*0 RCDR } Rcdr X1*0] Disable recording.
View record status E X1RCDR } X58@ ] View status.

KEY: X58@ = Recording mode 0 = Channel A disabled, 1 = Single Recording in Composite mode
2 = Internal + Secondary Recording in Composite mode

Enable/Disable Archive Recording (Dual Channel mode)

Set archive channel A E X1* X( RCDR } Rcdr X1*X(] Set archive channel A.
View channel A record E X1RCDR } X(] View channel A record status.
status
Set archive channel B E X2* X( RCDR } Rcdr X2*X(] Set archive channel B.
View ch B record status E X2RCDR } X(] View channel B record status.

KEY: X( = Enabled/Disabled 0 = Disabled (default), 1 = Enabled

Enable/Disable Virtual Input Recording (with firmware v3.04 or higher)

Set virtual input 1 E X4* X( RCDR } Rcdr X4*X(]
View virtual input 1 E X4RCDR } X(]
record status
Set virtual input 2 E X5* X( RCDR } Rcdr X5*X(]
View virtual input 2 E X5RCDR } X(]
record status

KEY: X( = Enabled/Disabled 0 = Disabled (default), 1 = Enabled

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 131

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Encoder Settings (Archive Encode and Recording) continued
Delayed Recording Start for Ad hoc
NOTE: The Mirroring LinkLicense is required in order to set the delay duration command.

Delay duration E P X59# RCDR} Rcdr P X59#] Delay ad hoc recording start for
X59# seconds.
View delay duration E PRCDR} X59#] Query original setting.
View recording start RecStart X59#] Unsolicited response to display
countdown Example RecStart12], recording start countdown.
RecStart11],
RecStart10 ...]

KEY: X59# = Delay duration in seconds 5 to 60 seconds (default = 5).

Recording Profiles
Recall recording profile E R5* X53) PRST } PrstR5* X53) ]
Query active profile E L5PRST } PrstL5* X53) ] Verbose 2/3 mode
View selected profile EV5*X53) PRST } PrstV5* X52( ] Verbose 2/3 mode
Delete recording profile EX5*X53) PRST } PrstX5* X53)]

KEY: X53) = Presets 1 to 32 (two digit response — 0 padding)

X52( = Json string of recording profile parameters (for example: [“id”:1,”name”;”RECORD PROFILE 01”, “contributor”:”Contributor1”,
“coverage”;”Coverage1”, Presentor1....})

Encoder Profile
Set profile E X50)* X4) EPRO } EproX50)* X4) ] Set encode profile to X4).
View profile E X50) EPRO } X4) ] View encode profile X4).
Set output mode E1*X4! SMOD } Smod1* X4! ] Set output mode to X4!.
View output mode E1 SMOD } X4!] View output mode X4!.

KEY: X4) = Encode profile

1 = Base, 2 = Main, 3 = High
X4! = Output mode
1 = Video and audio, 2 = Video only
X50) = Stream selection
1 = Archive Channel A, 2 = Archive Channel B (Available for Dual Channel mode only)
3 = Confidence

Composite/Dual Channel Encoder Mode

Set archive encoding E 1* X50# ENCM } Encm 1*X50#] Select encoding mode for
mode Archive.
View selected encoding E 1ENCM } X50#] View encoding mode for
mode Archive.

KEY: X50# = Encoding mode 0 = Composite mode, 1 = Dual Channel mode

Dual Channel HDMI Output

Set HDMI output E X6$ OMOD } Omod X6$] Set HDMI output to X6$.
Query HDMI output E OMOD } X6$ ]

KEY: X6$ = HDMI output 0 = Channel A full screen, 1 = Channel B full screen, 2 = Confidence layout

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 132

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Encoder Settings (Archive Encode and Recording) continued
HDMI Video Mute
Enable blanking 99* 1B Vmt9 Blanks HDMI video output.
9*1]
Disable blanking 99* 0B Vmt99*0 ] Displays HDMI video output.
View status 99B X( ] View the video mute status.
HDMI Audio Mute
Mute HDMI audio 99* 1Z Amt99*1] Mute HDMI audio output.
Unmute HDMI audio 99* 0Z Amt99*0 ] Unmute HDMI audio output.
View status 99Z X( ] View the audio mute status.

KEY: X( = Disable/Enable 0 = Disabled/unmuted (default), 1 = Enabled/muted

Group of Pictures (GOP) Length

Set GOP length E X50)* X4% GOPL } Gopl X50)* X4% ] Set GOP length to X4%.
View GOP length E X50) GOPL } X4% ]

KEY: X4% = GOP length 1 to 300

Bit Rate Control

Set bit rate control type E X50)* X4@ BRCT } Brct X50)* X4@ ] Set bit rate control type to X4@.
View bit rate control E X50) BRCT } X4@ ]
type
Video Bit Rate
Set video bit rate E VX50)* X4# BITR } BitrV X50)* X4# ] Set video bit rate to X4#.
View video bit rate E VX50) BITR } X4# ]
Audio Bit Rate
Set audio bit rate E AX50)* X4$ BITR } BitrA X50)* X4$ ] Set audio bit rate to X4$.
View audio bit rate E AX50) BITR } X4$ ]

KEY: X4@ = Bit rate control type 0 = VBR (default), 1 = CVBR, 2 = CBR
X4# = Video bit rate 00200 to 10000 (5-digit response)
X4$ = Audio bit rate 80, 96, 128, 192, 256, 320
X50) = Stream selection 1 = Archive Channel A, 2 = Archive Channel B (Dual Channel mode only), 3 = Confidence

Recording Thumbnail Size

Set thumbnail size E T X54% RCDR } RcdrT X54% ]
View recording thumbnail E TRCDR } X54% ]
size

KEY: X54% = Thumbnail size 0 = Normal (default), 1 = Follows archive resolution

Preview Output Refresh Rate

Set preview output E X4* RATE } Rate X4* ]
refresh rate
View output refresh rate E RATE } X4* ]

KEY: X4* = Output refresh rate 1 = 60 Hz (default), 2 = 50 Hz

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 133

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Record Resolution and Frame Rate
Set record resolution E X50)* X4^ VRES } Vres X50)* X4^ ]
View record resolution E X50) VRES } X4^ ]
Set record frame rate E X50)* X4& VFRM } Vfrm X50)* X4& ]
View record frame rate E X50) VFRM } X4& ]
View record resolution 33I Horz resolution x Vert resolution*Frame rate ]
and frame rate (For Example 1280x 720*30 ]
composite mode only)
View current recording 1*I <ChA X50@*ChB X50!>*<X4^>*<X4&>*<X54#>*<X4#>]
information (For Verbose mode 2/3 Inf*<ChA X50@*ChB X50!>*<X4^>*<X4&>*<X54#>*<X4#>]
composite mode only)

KEY: X4# = Video bit rate 00200 to 10000 (5-digit response)

X4^ = Record resolution 480p, 720p, 1080p, 512x288, 1024x768, 1280x1024, Custom
X4& = Record frame rate 1 = 30, 2 = 25, 3 = 24, 4 = 15, 5 = 12.5, 6 = 12, 7 = 10, 8=5
X50) = Stream selection 1 = Archive Channel A, 2 = Archive Channel B (Dual Channel mode only), 3 = Confidence
X50! = Input number 1 to 5
X50@ = Output channel 1 = A, 2=B
X54# = File size File size in mega Bytes

Advanced Configuration
Overscan Mode
Set overscan mode E X50$* X51) OSCN} Oscn X50$* X51)] Sets input type X50$ to overscan
mode X51).
View overscan mode E X50$ OSCN} X51)] View the current overscan X51)
for input type X50$.

KEY: X50$ = Input video format 1 = YUVp/HDTV (default), 2 = YUVi, 3 = Composite

X51) = Overscan 0 = 0% (default: HDMI inputs), 1 = 2.5% (default: YUVp input), 2 = 5.0% (default: YUVi and composite inputs)

Test Pattern
Set test pattern E X56% TEST} Test X56%]
View test pattern E TEST} X56%]

KEY: X56% = Test patterns 0 = Off (default), 1 = Color bars, 2 = Aspect ratio 1.33, 3 = Aspect ratio 1.78, 4 = Aspect ratio 1.85,
5 = Crop, 6 = Pulse, 7 = Timestamp (composite mode only), 8 = Universal OSD (composite mode only)

HDCP Settings (HDMI Inputs only)

View input HDCP status EI X50! HDCP} X51!]
Set input HDCP EE1* X50! HDCP} HdcpE X50!*1] Turn HDCP authorized device
authorization on on for input X50!
Set input HDCP EE0* X50! HDCP} HdcpE X50!*0] Turn HDCP authorized device
authorization off off for input X50! (default)
View input HDCP EE X50! HDCP} X(]
authorization
Enable HDCP E N1HDCP} HdcpN1] Enable green screen HDCP
notification notification (default)
Disable HDCP E N0HDCP} HdcpN0] Disable green screen HDCP
notification notification
View HDCP notification E NHDCP} X51@]

KEY: X( = On/off 0 = Disabled/off (default), 1 = Enabled/on

X50! = Input number 1 to 5
X51! = HDCP status 0 = No sink/source detected, 1 = HDCP detected, 2 = Sink/source detected but no HDCP
X51@ = HDCP notification 0 = Off (mute output to black), 1 = On (green HDCP notification-screen, default)

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 134

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Advanced Configuration continued
Safely Eject USB Storage
Eject USB storage E  X59! USBE} USBE X59!]

KEY: X59! = Eject USB storage 0 = All USB storage, 2 = USBFront, 3 = USBRear, 4 = USBRCP

Horizontal Video Mirroring

Enable mirroring per E I X! *4ROTA} RotaI X! *4] Turn on mirroring for input X!.
input
Disable mirroring per E I X! *0ROTA} RotaI X! *0] Turn off mirroring for input X!.
input
View setting E I X! ROTA} RotaI X!] View mirroring setting.

KEY: X! = Inputs 1 through 4 (1 through 5 for SDI model)

Background Image (for composite mode only)

Select background E filenameRF} Imr filename]
filename
View background E RF} "filename"]
filename
Mute background E 0RF} Imr0]
image
Audio
Audio Input Format
Set audio format E I X!* X3) AFMT } AfmtI X!* X3) ]
View E I X! AFMT } X3) ]

KEY: X! = Audio input 1 to 4, 1 to 5 for SDI models

X3) = Audio format 0 = Disable audio, 1 = Analog (default for input 3), 2 = LPCM 2 CH (default)

Audio Output (Channel Selection)

Recall preset X56&. Rpr X56& ] Recall audio output preset X56&.

KEY: X56& = Audio output 1 = Ch A, 2 = Ch B, 3 = Ch A + Ch B, 4 = Ch A + Ch B (Analog dual mono enabled only),

5 = Ch B Dual mono (Analog dual mono enabled only)

Audio Delay
NOTE: Set the audio delay to zero to disable it.

Set audio delay E 1* X56$ ADLY } Adly1* X56$ ]

View E 1 ADLY } X56$ ] View audio delay value.

KEY: X56$ = Audio delay 000 to 999 ms (default 0 ms, 3-digit response)

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 135

Command Function SIS Command Response Additional Description
(Host to Device) (Device to Host)
Audio continued
Audio Mute
Mute audio channel E M X50^*1AU} DsM X50^*1] Mute audio channel X50^.
Unmute audio channel E M X50^*0AU} DsM X50^*0] Unmute audio channel X50^.
View audio channel E M X50^ AU} X(]
mute status

NOTE: The audio output mute setting applies to the stream, recording, and confidence.

KEY: X( = Mute/unmute
0 = Unmuted (default), 1 = Muted
X50^ = Audio selection
40000 = Analog Input A (Left), 40001 = Analog Input A (Right), 40002 = Digital input A (Left)
40003 = Digital input A (Right), 40004 = Analog Input B (Left), 40005 = Analog Input B (Right
40006 = Digital input B (Left), 40007 = Digital input B (Right), 60000 = Output (Left, for audio mute control
only), 60001 = Output (Right, for audio mute control only)

Audio Level
Set input audio level E G X50^*X50& AU} DsG X50^* X50&] Set audio input channel X50^ to
level X50&.
Example E G 40000*100AU} DsG40000*100] Set analog audio input A (left) to
+10 dB.
View input audio level E G X50^ AU} X50&] View input audio channel X50^
level X50&.
Example E G 40000AU} 100] Analog audio input A (left) is set
to +10 dB.

KEY: X50^ = Audio selection 40000 = Analog Input A (Left), 40001 = Analog Input A (Right), 40002 = Digital input A (Left)
40003 = Digital input A (Right), 40004 = Analog Input B (Left), 40005 = Analog Input B (Right
40006 = Digital input B (Left), 40007 = Digital input B (Right), 60000 = Output (Left, for audio mute control
only), 60001 = Output (Right, for audio mute control only)
X50& = Audio level Audio level in 0.1 dB steps (-180 to 240 = -18.0 to +24.0 dB)

Audio
View front panel audio 34I X58!*X58!] left*right
level indicators Verbose 2/3 mode Inf34*X58!*X58!]
Example: -58*-63 ]

KEY: X58! = Front panel audio level left*right: -1500 to 0, Full bars = 0, No bars = ≤-600

EDID Minder
Assign EDID to specific E A X50!*X6* EDID } EdidA X50!*X6* ]
input
View EDID assignment E A X50! EDID } X6* ]
Import EDID to user E I X6&,[filename] EdidI X6&] Import a 128 or 256-Byte binary
location EDID} EDID file to the user loaded
EDID location [1 to 3].
Export EDID in binary E E X6*,[filename] EdidEX6* ] Export a 128 or 256-Byte binary
format EDID} EDID file from EDID location X6*.
[filename] can optionally carry a
full path name. The EDID file is
a .bin file, carrying 128 or 256
bytes of binary data.

KEY: X6& = EDID User loaded slots 1, 2, and 4

X6* = EDID number See EDID Values on page 137
X50! = Input number 1 to 5

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 136

 EDID Values
X6* Resolution Refresh Rate Type Video Format Audio
1 800 x 600 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
2 1024 x 768 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
3 1280 x 720 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
4 1280 x 768 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
5 1280 x 800 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
7 1360 x 768 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
8 1366 x 768 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
9 1400 x 1050 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
10 1440 x 900 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
11 1600 x 900 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
12 1600 x 1200 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
13 1680 x 1050 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
14 1920 x 1080 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
15 1920 x 1200 60 Hz PC DVI N/A
16 800 x 600 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
17 1024 x 768 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
18 1280 x 768 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
19 1280 x 800 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
20 1280 x 1024 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
21 1360 x 768 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
22 1366 x 768 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
23 1400 x 1050 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
24 1440 x 900 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
25 1600 x 900 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
26 1600 x 1200 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
27 1680 x 1050 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
28 1920 x 1200 60 Hz PC HDMI 2-Ch
29 480p 60 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
30 576p 50 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
31 720p 50 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
32* 720p 60 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
33 1080i 50 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
34 1080i 60 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
35 1080p 25 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
36 1080p 50 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
37 1080p 24 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
38 1080p 60 Hz HDTV HDMI 2-Ch
39 User Loaded Slot 1
40 User Loaded Slot 2
41 User Loaded Slot 3
* Default

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 137

Reference
Information

This section provides information about:

• Mounting the SMP 300 Series
• Supported File Types, Drive Formats, Browsers, and Browser Plugins
• DataViewer
• Streaming Method Overview
• Estimating Storage Requirements for a Recording
• Front Panel Menu Diagrams
• Front Panel Menu Diagrams (Record/Stream Configuration)

Mounting the SMP 300 Series

The 1U high, full rack width, 11.5 inch deep SMP 300 Series Streaming Media Decoders
can be:
• Set on a table
• Mounted on a rack shelf
• Mounted under a desk or tabletop
• Mounted on a projector bracket
See the SMP 300 Series product page at www.extron.com for compatible mounting kits.

Tabletop Use
The SMP 300 Series includes rubber feet (not installed). For tabletop use, attach a
self‑adhesive rubber foot to each corner on the bottom of the unit.

Furniture Mounting
Furniture mount the SMP 300 Series using an optional under‑desk or through‑desk
mounting kit. Follow the instructions included with the mounting kit.

Table or Wall Mounting

Extron table or wall mounting brackets extend approximately 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) above the
top surface of the SMP 300 Series enclosure. This design allows an air space between the
mounting surface and the enclosure. Follow the instructions included with the mounting kit.

Rack Mounting
For rack mounting using the included rack mounts, do not install the rubber feet. Mount the
SMP 300 Series on a 19 inch universal or basic rack shelf.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 138

UL Rack Mounting Guidelines
The following Underwriters Laboratories (UL) guidelines pertain to the safe installation of the
SMP 300 Series in a rack.

CAUTION:
• Elevated operating ambient temperature — If the unit installed in a closed
or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient temperature of the rack
environment can be greater than room ambient temperature. Therefore, install the
unit in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature (Tma =
+122°F, +50°C) specified by Extron.
• Reduced air flow — Install the equipment in a rack so that the amount of air flow
required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.
• Mechanical loading — Mount the equipment in the rack so that uneven
mechanical loading does not produce a hazardous condition.
• Circuit overloading — Connect the equipment to the supply circuit and consider
the effect that circuit overloading might have on overcurrent protection and supply
wiring. Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used
when addressing this concern.
• Reliable earthing (grounding) — Maintain reliable grounding of rack-mounted
equipment. Pay particular attention to supply connections other than direct
connections to the branch circuit (for example use of power strips).

Consignes UL pour le montage en rack

Les consignes UL (« Underwriters Laboratories ») suivantes concernent l’installation en rack
d’un boîtier SMP 300 Series :

ATTENTION :
• Température ambiante élevée — En cas d’installation de l’équipement dans
un rack fermé ou composé de plusieurs unités, la température du rack peut être
supérieure à la température ambiante. Par conséquent, il est préférable d’installer
l’équipement dans un environnement qui respecte la température ambiante
maximale (Tma = +122°F, +50°C) spécifiée par Extron.
• Réduction du flux d’air — Si l’équipement est installé dans un rack, veillez à ce
que le flux d’air nécessaire pour un fonctionnement sécurisé de l’équipement soit
respecté.
• Charge mécanique — Installez l’équipement en rack de manière à éviter toute
situation dangereuse causée par le déséquilibre de la charge mécanique.
• Surcharge électrique — Lorsque vous connectez l’équipement au circuit
d’alimentation, observez la connexion de l’équipement et étudiez les effets
possibles d’une surcharge du circuit sur les protections contre les surintensités et
les conducteurs d’alimentation. Consultez à cet égard les indications de la plaque
d’identification de l’équipement.
• Mise à la terre — Assurez-vous que l’équipement est correctement mis à la terre.
Accordez une attention particulière aux connexions électriques autres que les
connexions directes au circuit de dérivation (ex. : les multiprises).

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 139

Supported File Types, Drive Formats, Browsers, and Browser Plugins
File Formats
The SMP 300 Series creates *.m4v and mp4 video and m4a audio files, and *.jpg thumbnail
and chapter marker images. They use still image files for background material. Optional
fonts can be used for on-screen displays.

Recording File Types

• mp4 (as m4v), m4a

Still Image File Types

• png (for background images)
• jpg (for SMP-created thumbnails and chapter markers)

Font File Types

• TrueType™ (.ttf)
• OpenType® (.otf)
NOTE: To upload a font file, use the file upload utility within the File Management
page. The user is responsible for obtaining any necessary font licenses before
uploading fonts to the SMP.

Drive Formats
The SMP 300 Series supports FAT32, NTFS, and VFAT long file names, EXT2, EXT3 and
EXT4 formats for USB drives that are used for file storage.
NOTE: For FAT32 USB storage, file sizes must be limited to 4 GB or the recording
creates multiple 4 GB files. FAT32 internal recording does not have the 4 GB size limit,
if unlimited file size is selected.

Browsers
In order to view the SMP 300 Series embedded web pages, use one of the supported web
browsers (see PC Requirements on page 3).
NOTE: The preview video in the AV Controls panel of the SMP uses an HTML5 player
and is not supported by Microsoft Internet Explorer v.11, Microsoft Edge, or Apple
Safari. To see a preview of the current stream either:
Use a different browser, or
Open a standalone, third-party video player (such as VideoLAN™ open source VLC™
media player) and connect to the confidence stream from the SMP.

Browser Plugins
Supported web browser streaming player plugins for use with the embedded web pages
include the following:
• Extron Streaming Media Player (SMP) for Windows
• VideoLAN VLC
• Apple QuickTime

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 140

DataViewer
DataViewer is an enhanced terminal emulation program that facilitates analysis of RS-232,
USB, and TCP/IP communication with Extron devices. The software allows users to send
commands to a device and view the responses in ASCII or hexadecimal format. Command
and response logs can be saved in text or HTML format.
Download the installation file and load the program on the PC connected to the SMP 300
Series. DataViewer is available at www.extron.com.

Start the DataViewer program

1. Click the desktop icon.
2. The Communications Setup dialog box opens. Select a Communication tab.
a. Select the Comm Port (RS-232) tab (see figure 95, 1) if using the rear panel
RS-232 port.
b. Select the TCP/IP tab (2) if using a network connection.
c. Select the USB tab (3) if using the front panel config port.

1 2 3
Extron USB Device

Figure 95. Communications Dialogs

3. Select the startup options:
a. If RS-232 is selected, configure the port settings (1).
b. If TCP/IP is selected, configure the IP address and Telnet port (2). Enter a
password.
NOTE: The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have
been set to the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset,
the passwords convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and
Roles on page 86 to change a password).
c. If USB is selected, choose Extron USB Device in the drop-down list (3).
NOTE: To automatically connect to the SMP 300 Series, select Connect on
startup.
4. Click OK to connect to the SMP 300 Series and start using the program.
You are now ready to begin entering commands. Open the DataViewer Help file from the
toolbar for more information on the program.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 141

 Sending commands using a TCP/IP connection
1. Configure the network settings of a control PC to connect it to the same network as the
SMP 300 Series. Connect the control PC to the network with an RJ-45 cable.
2. Start the DataViewer program (see Start the DataViewer program on page 141) and
follow the steps to connect to the SMP 300 Series via TCP/IP.
3. On the Communication Setup window (see figure 95):
1. Select the TCP/IP tab.
2. Enter the IP address of the SMP 300 Series into the Hostname/IP Address field.
3. In the Telnet Port field, enter the port number for the connection.
NOTE: The default telnet port for SIS commands is port 23.
4. Click OK. The Communication Setup dialog closes.
The main DataViewer dialog opens and the SMP 300 Series responds with a copyright
statement containing the model number, part number, and current firmware version of
the connected SMP 300 Series, along with the date (see figure 96, 2).

1 2

3 4

Figure 96. Enter Commands and View Responses

5. Use the Commands field to enter SIS commands (see figure 96, 1). View the responses
in the Responses field (2).
For example, enter 1I, the command to display the model name, in the Commands field
(3). The Responses field (4) returns the model name and number of the connected
device.

What is an IP Address?
A full explanation of IP addressing is beyond the scope of this user guide. However, the
following information is enough to get started.
An IP address is a 32-bit binary number used to identify each device on an Ethernet
network. This number is usually represented by four decimal numbers (each in the range
0 to 255) separated by dots, (for example, 198.123.34.240). This is called "dotted decimal
notation".
An IP address is divided into two parts:
• The network identifier
• The host identifier
On a given network, each address must have the same network identifier value, but have a
unique host identifier. There are, therefore, different classes of addresses that define:
• The range of valid addresses.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 142

 • The parts of the address used to identify the network and host.
The most common IP address classes are:

Class Valid Address Range Identifier Arrangement

Class A 0.0.0.1 to 127.255.255.254 NNN.HHH.HHH.HHH
Class B 128.0.0.1 through 191.255.255.254 NNN.NNN.HHH.HHH
Class C 192.0.0.1 through 223.255.255.254 NNN.NNN.NNN.HHH

NOTES:
• NNN = Network identifier
• HHH = Host identifier

Private and Public Address Ranges

Within each of the classes are a range of addresses designated as "private" addresses.
These addresses should only be used on private local networks and intranets and cannot
be accessed directly from the Internet.
• 10.0.0.0 – 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 – 172.31.255.255
• 169.254.0.0 – 169.254.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 – 192.168.255.255
Addresses outside these ranges are considered "public".

Multicast Address Range

A further range of addresses is available for private multicast domain use:
• 239.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255
These addresses (also known as class D addresses) are used to allow several devices to be
part of the same multicast group. Each device in the group has the same multicast address
and can effectively send data to all other devices in the same group simultaneously.
NOTE: The SMP uses 239.199.188.138 as the default multicast address for the
archive stream and 239.199.188.142 as the confidence stream default.

Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a 32-bit binary number used to "mask" certain bits of the IP address. It
extends the number of network options available for the IP address. The subnet mask does
this by allowing part of the host identifier to be used as a subnetwork identifier.
It is important that the correct value is used for the subnet mask. The value of the subnet
mask is dependent on the IP address class being used. Use the table below and the table
in the What is an IP Address? section on page 142 to select the subnet mask class that
matches the IP address class.

Class Subnet Mask

Class A 255.0.0.0
Class B 255.255.0.0
Class C 255.255.255.0

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 143

Port Number
A port number is combined with the IP address to create an application‑specific or
process‑specific address. The port number can uniquely identify an application or process
on a computer and thereby enable the computer to share a single Ethernet connection
for multiple requirements. A port number is always associated with the IP address of the
computer, as well as the type of protocol used for network communication.
The SMP uses specific ports, but can be configured to meet most requirements. In addition
to the default ports, any port in the available range (1024 to 65535) can be used.
NOTE: Ports previously assigned and currently in use by the SMP cannot be used
again.
All streaming methods (except TS/UDP push) use multiple port numbers. The following
table shows the number of ports used by each streaming method. Archive and confidence
streams have different port numbers.
RTSP (Pull) TS/UDP TS/RTP ES/RTP
(Push) (Push) (Push)
Unicast (per stream) 4* 1 2 4*
Multicast 4* 1 2 4*
* 4 ports for "Audio/Video", or 2 ports for "Video only"

When the SMP 300 Series ports are configured, only the initial port is entered by the user.
The SMP 300 Series firmware then assigns the multiple port numbers based on the initial
port number.

Choosing an IP Address
If the SMP 300 Series and other devices are connected via an independent network,
then follow the guidelines below when choosing IP addresses. However, if the SMP 300
Series and other devices are being connected to an existing network, advise the network
administrator and ask them to assign suitable addresses.
On an independent network, nearly any type of address can be used (in theory). However,
it is generally recommended that class C addresses are used (192.0.0.1 through
223.255.255.255).
There are two rules for choosing IP addresses:
• The network identifier must be the same for each address.
• The host identifier must be unique for each address.
Applying these rules to class C addresses, the first three decimal values of the IP addresses
must all be the same, while the last value is used to uniquely identify each device.
The table below shows an example of a valid class C addressing scheme.
Device IP Address Subnet Mask
Device 1 208.132.180.41 255.255.255.0
Device 2 208.132.180.42 255.255.255.0
Device 3 208.132.180.43 255.255.255.0

NOTE: The host identifiers (41, 42, and 43 in the example above) do not need to be
sequential or in any particular order. However, it is recommended that the numbers are
grouped for simplicity.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 144

 The table below shows an example of an invalid class C addressing scheme.
Device IP Address Subnet Mask
Device 1 208.132.180.41 255.255.255.0
Device 2 192.157.180.42 255.255.255.0
Device 3 208.132.180.41 255.255.255.0

Assuming the IP address for device 1 is valid, the IP address for device 2 is invalid because
the network identifier for each address must begin with 208.132.180.xxx. The IP address
for device 3 is invalid because it is using the same IP address as device 1.
The ping command can be used from a computer (see Using the Ping Utility to Test
Communications on page 145) or from the web interface to ensure that a device at an
IP address is responding correctly.

Using the Ping Utility to Test Communications

Use the ping command to test communications between a Windows-based computer and
another device on the same network.
1. From the desktop, select Start > Run.
2. The Run dialog box displays. In the Open field, enter ping nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn –t
(where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the IP address of the device to test).
3. Click OK or press the <Enter> key. A window opens showing a series of response
messages (explained below).
4. To stop the ping utility, press <Ctrl + C> on the keyboard.
NOTE: The embedded web page includes a ping utility (see Diagnostic Tools on
page 101).

Response Messages
While running the ping utility, a series of response messages are displayed to determine
the status of the communications link. For example, pinging a device with the IP address
208.132.180.48 replies with a message similar to the following:
Reply from 208.132.180.48: bytes=32 time=2ms TTL=32
This is the correct response indicating that the device at the specified address is
communicating correctly. The response time value may vary according to network traffic. If
one of the following messages are received:
• Request timed out — There has been no response from the specified address. Either
the processor is not receiving data (from the computer) or is not sending data back.
Check that the device is powered on and set to the same address that was pinged.
Also, check that the device is correctly connected to the network.
• Reply from 208.132.180.48: Destination host unreachable — The IP address
of the computer is not in the same class as the device being pinged. Check that the
subnet mask on both the computer and the device are set to the same value. Also
check that both IP addresses are within the correct range for the chosen class and
are compatible (see Subnet Mask on page 143 and What is an IP Address? on
page 142 to select the subnet mask class that matches the IP address class).

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 145

 Multicast IP Addressing for Multiple SMP 300 Series Installations

Pull streaming (RTSP)

When multiple SMP 300 Series devices are installed in a system and multicast addressing is
used for push or pull streaming, please follow the guidelines below for configuration.
NOTE: To prevent conflicts, always check to see if other devices using the same IP
address have already used a port number before using it in the SMP 300 Series.
For most applications, the multicast address should use 239 as the first octet and should
be unique for each SMP 300 Series. The port number can remain at the default (12340) as
shown in the next table.

Device SMP IP Multicast IP Multicast Port

SMP1 192.168.254.10 239.199.188.138 12340
SMP2 192.168.254.11 239.199.188.139 12340
SMP3 192.168.254.12 239.199.188.140 12340

NOTE: The SMP 300 Series automatically inserts the ending port number when the
initial port number is entered.

Push streaming (TS/UDP, TS/RTP, ES/RTP)

Push streams to a multicast address generally require only two ports, except for
ES/RTP which requires four. When push streaming from multiple SMP 300 Series devices to
multicast addresses, the same IP address rules apply as with pull streaming.
For push streaming, the destination IP and port number are adjusted using the encoder
presets page.

Streaming Method Overview

The streaming method used by the SMP 300 Series should be considered carefully.
Multicast is typically used for live multicasting a "one-to-many" session when it is known
there are multiple viewers of a stream. Unicast streaming is used for on-demand video
where the network infrastructure does not support multicast traffic. Typically, unicast
streaming is used for a point-to-point (one-to-one) connection.

Protocols Used for Streaming

Streaming protocols must be selected based on the streaming method and the SMP 300
Series capability. The following transport layer protocols can be used for SMP streaming.
Pull Push
Unicast Multicast Unicast Multicast
RTP (RTP over UDP) RTP (RTP over UDP) TS/UDP TS/UDP
TS/RTP TS/RTP
ES/RTP (Native RTP) ES/RTP (Native RTP)

The transport protocols are summarized in this section. For information on how to change
the SMP 300 Series transport protocol, see Streaming on page 36.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 146

Multicast Streaming Method — An Overview
This streaming method is used for live video multicasting with low latency in a "one‑to‑many"
streaming session. The SMP 300 Series uses a variety of streaming protocols to send data
to a multicast group. Using multicasting, the SMP 300 Series does not need to know the IP
address of the devices viewing the stream. This allows a large number of users to view the
data simultaneously while using bandwidth efficiently. The maximum number of connected
users is dependent on the type of distribution network used.
NOTE: To use this streaming method, each network must be configured to pass
multicast broadcasts.
Multicast streaming can use push or pull streaming. It can push the data to a network for
broader distribution, or to many individual viewing devices. It can also use pull streaming,
where the SMP 300 Series waits for viewing devices to request the stream before
broadcasting.

Streaming Streaming
Protocol Protocol
SMP 300 Series Viewing
NETWORK device
(encoder)
SMP 300 Series sends data Streaming
Protocol
to a multicast group. Viewing
device
Streaming
Protocol
Viewing
device
Streaming
Protocol
Viewing
device
Streaming
Protocol
Additional
devices
Multiple devices can be
part of the multicast group.
Figure 97. Multicast Streaming
NOTE: IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) multicast protocol is used by
routers and switches to deliver streams to subscribing endpoints. The SMP 300 Series
delivers packets and frames onto the network that are identified as multicast. An IGMP
multicast conserves network bandwidth because the SMP 300 Series only sends data
when a connection is made by a user. All network switches and routing equipment
must be properly configured to support IGMP snooping and IGMP query to avoid
flooding all endpoints with unnecessary streaming traffic.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 147

Unicast Streaming Method — An Overview
This streaming method is used for on-demand video with low latency and uses a variety
of streaming protocols. It can be used where the network infrastructure does not support
multicast traffic. Typically, unicast streaming is used for a point-to-point (one-to-one)
connection (SMP 300 Series to single viewing device), but can be configured to use multiple
active connections.
Unicast streaming can use push or pull streaming. It can push the data to individual or
multiple viewing devices, or it can use pull steaming, where the SMP 300 Series waits for an
individual viewing device to request the stream before broadcasting.

1 to n Device 1
SMP 300 Series Viewing
NETWORK device
(encoder)
SMP 300 Series sends data to
Device 2 Viewing
specified devices.
device

Device 3 Viewing
device

Device n Viewing
device

Figure 98. Unicast Streaming

NOTES:
• When unicast streaming, the SMP 300 Series sends an individual stream to each
viewing device. This means that the total bandwidth increases as the number of
actively connected viewing devices increases and the total bandwidth decreases as
the number of actively connected viewing devices decreases.
• In the figure above, n represents an unspecified number of additional streams.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 148

Streaming Playback Methods
Streams from the SMP 300 Series can be viewed using various playback methods.
NOTE: The procedures presented in the following sections use a Microsoft Windows
operating system and version 2.0.2 of VLC media player. These procedures may vary
when a different operating system is used or when different versions of the VLC media
player are used.

The following streaming playback methods are discussed:

• Push and Pull Streaming
• Playing a Push or Pull Stream Using VLC Media Player®

Push and Pull Streaming

The client computer or media player can either search the network for active streams (push
streaming from the encoder) and select the desired video, or send a request to the encoder
to begin streaming a video to it (pull streaming).
Push Streaming
Viewers select an active
stream from SMP 300 Series.

Stream Stream
SMP 300 Series Viewing
NETWORK device #1
(encoder)
SMP 300 Series sends data Stream
to all viewing devices Viewing
whether a request is device #2
made or not.
Stream
Viewing
device #3
Stream
Viewing
device #4
Stream
Additional
devices

Pull Streaming
Viewer #1 and #3 request
Request
stream from SMP 300 Series.

Stream Stream
SMP 300 Series Viewing
NETWORK device #1
(encoder)
SMP 300 Series sends stream
to #1 and #3 viewing Viewing
devices only when device #2
request is received.
If no requests are received, Stream
no stream is broadcast. Viewing
device #3

Viewing
device #4

Additional
devices

Figure 99. Push and Pull Streaming

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 149

 Push Stream and Pull Stream Playback URLs
To verify a running stream, use the templates below to place the stream into the VLC "Open
Network Stream" dialog (see step 5 of Playing a Pull Stream Using VLC Media Player
on page 153). Substitute the SMP IP address for <SMP35x_IP>. Substitute the destination
IP address and port number for <DESTINATION_IP>:DESTINATION_PORT.

Pull Stream URLs

PULL Streaming: URL
RTSP Unicast rtsp://<SMP35x_IP>/<stream name 1>
(Archive Channel A)
RTSP Unicast (Archive Channel B) rtsp://<SMP35x_IP>/<stream name 2>
NOTE: This stream is available only on units that are set for dual
encoding mode.

RTSP Unicast (Confidence) rtsp://<SMP35x_IP>/<stream name 3>

RTSP Multicast rtsp://<SMP35x_IP>/<stream name 1>/multicast
(Archive Channel A) or
HTTP://<SMP35x_IP>/live/pull/multicast1.sdp
RTSP Multicast rtsp://<SMP35x_IP>/stream name 2/multicast
(Archive Channel B) or
HTTP://<SMP35x_IP>/live/pull/multicast2.sdp
NOTE: This stream is available only on units that are set for dual
encoding mode.

RTSP Multicast (Confidence) rtsp://<SMP35x_IP>/<stream name 3>/multicast

or
HTTP://<SMP35x_IP>/live/pull/multicast3.sdp

Push Stream URLs

PUSH Streaming:
Unicast (Destination IP must be set to the location where the stream is played)
TS/UDP UDP://@:DESTINATION_PORT
TS/RTP RTP://@:DESTINATION_PORT
ES/RTP (Archive Channel A HTTP://<SMP35x_IP>/live/push/s1.sdp
ES/RTP (Archive Channel B) HTTP://<SMP35x_IP>/live/push/s2.sdp
NOTE: This stream is available only on units that are set for dual
encoding mode.

ES/RTP (confidence) HTTP://<SMP352_IP>/live/push/s3.sdp

Multicast (Destination IP must be multicast IP address)
TS/UDP UDP://@<DESTINATION_IP>:DESTINATION_PORT
TS/RTP RTP://@<DESTINATION_IP>:DESTINATION_PORT
ES/RTP (Archive Channel A) HTTP://<SMP35x_IP>/live/push/s1.sdp
ES/RTP (Archive Channel B) HTTP://<SMP35x_IP>/live/push/s2.sdp
NOTE: This stream is available only on units that are set for
dual encoding mode.

ES/RTP (confidence) HTTP://<SMP35x_IP>/live/push/s3.sdp

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 150

 NOTES:
• <SMP35x_IP> is the IP address of the SMP 300 Series.
• For push URLs, the Destination Port is the lowest port in the Port Range set from
the web page.
• UDP://@:DESTINATION_PORT default is UDP://@:12340.
• Some dependencies may apply with certain versions of VLC.
• For ES/RTP, SAP is available in Video only stream mode.

Streaming Capabilities and System Scalability

The following tables detail the streaming capabilities of the SMP 300 Series. Data for the
tables was obtained through laboratory testing using optimal bandwidth conditions and can
vary depending on the selected video bit rate.
NOTE: Testing to determine the approximate maximum number of pull streams was
done on the Archive encoder with one pull unicast confidence stream. Recording while
streaming does not reduce the maximum number of pull streams.

Available Unicast Streams

Video resolution and bit rate affect the total number of unicast streams (Archive and
Confidence) the SMP 300 Series can broadcast. The following table compares the selected
resolution and bit rate with the approximate number of unicast streams that are available.
Changing the resolution or using higher or lower bit rates may increase or decrease the
available number of streams.

Pull Stream Method

Unicast
Resolution Approximate Number of
Video Bit Rate (Kbps)
(Pixels x Lines @ frame rate) Pull Streams
848 x 480 @ 15 1500 40
1024 x 768 @ 15 2500 32
1280 x 1024 @ 30 3500 29
1280 x 720 @ 30 5000 23
1920 x 1080 @ 30 8000 16

NOTE: The following configuration options were set on the SMP:

• Stream Type = VBR
• GOP Length = 30
• Stream Mode = Video/Audio
• Layout = Full screen with high motion content
• Archive Pull Streaming Method = Unicast RTP
• Confidence Pull Streaming Method = Unicast RTP at default setting

Push Stream Method

The number of push unicast streams is one per encoder (the SMP 300 Series has two
encoders, Archive and Confidence in composite mode and 3 encoders, Archive Channel A,
Archive Channel B and confidence in dual channel mode).

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 151

Available Multicast Streams
The SMP 300 Series uses the IGMP multicast protocol to push or pull streams. The IGMP
multicast protocol provides increased bandwidth efficiency because the SMP 300 Series
only sends data when a connection is made by the user. All network switches and routing
equipment must be properly configured to support IGMP snooping and IGMP query to
avoid flooding all endpoints with unnecessary streaming traffic.
The table below indicates the approximate number of multicast streams supported by the
SMP 300 Series using the IGMP multicast protocol. Operating at different resolutions using
higher or lower bit rates can increase or decrease the scalability of the streaming system.
NOTE: For networks not configured to use the IGMP multicast protocol, consider using
a media server to deliver multiple unicast streams to control PCs and viewing devices.

Pull Stream Method

Multicast
Resolution Recommended Approximate Number of
(Pixels x Lines @ frame rate) Video Bit Rate Pull Streams
(Kbps)
1920  x 1080 @ 30 8000 >180

NOTE: The number of available pull streams is dependent on bandwidth and content
(high motion or static content).
The following configuration options were set on the SMP:
• Stream Type = VBR
• GOP Length = 30
• Stream Mode = Video/Audio
• Layout = Full screen with high motion content
• Archive Pull Streaming Method = Multicast UDP
• Confidence Pull Streaming Method = Unicast RTP at default
settings

If more streams are required, setting up a media server is the next step in expanding the
streaming architecture. A media server provides a scalable live streaming media solution.

Push Stream Method

The number of multicast push streams is not limited.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 152

Playing a Pull Stream Using VLC Media Player
Use the following procedure to play and view an SMP 300 Series stream using the VLC
media player.
1. If you know the stream URL, go to step 5. Otherwise, to obtain the stream URL, access
the web-based user interface of the SMP 300 Series (see Accessing the Web-Based
User Interface on page 53)
NOTES:
• If no password is set, anyone can view the stream URL. If a password is set,
you must be logged in to view the URL.
• The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have been
set to the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the
passwords convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and
Roles on page 86 to change a password).

2. The Recording Controls page opens. In the Stream URL panel, if the archive and
confidence streams are set to Pull (see Push Stream and Pull Stream Playback
URLs on page 150), the box displays the URL necessary to request a stream from the
SMP 300 Series. Note the full URL in figure 100 for later reference.

Figure 100. Recording Controls

3. Run the VLC media player. The media player opens.
4. Select Media > Open Network Stream (see figure 101).

Figure 101. VLC Media Player — Open a Network Stream

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 153

5. The Open Network Media dialog box opens. Using the stream URL that was noted
in step 2 on the previous page (rtsp://192.168.13.1/extron1), enter it into the
Please enter a network URL: field (see figure 102, 1).

Figure 102. Enter Stream URL Information and Play

6. Click Play (2). After a few seconds, the media streaming from the SMP 300 Series
plays on the VLC media player.
NOTE: The VLC media player image settings can now be changed if desired. For
information on adjusting the image settings, see the VLC media player help file.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 154

Playing a Push Stream Using Stream Announcement Protocol (SAP)
In order to play a push stream, the VLC player uses SAP to identify streams:
1. Open VLC. From the View menu, select Playlist (see figure 103).

Figure 103. VLC Playlist

2. From the left menu column, select Local Network (see figure 104, 2).
3. Select Network streams (SAP) (3).

Figure 104. Select Local Network Streams

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 155

4. VLC populates the playlist with all streams that contain SAP information. If a folder is
shown, open it to view the SAP streams inside (see figure 105, 1).

Figure 105. VLC - Select a Stream

5. Either double-click the desired stream to begin playback, or single-click, then use the
VLC player controls at the bottom of the window to view and control the stream.
NOTE: Depending on the announcement frequency, it may take several moments
before the SAP streams appear.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 156

Playing a Pull Stream Using QuickTime Media Player
Use the following procedure to playback and view SMP 300 Series streams on the
QuickTime player program.
1. If the stream URL is known, go to step 4. Otherwise, to obtain the stream URL, access
the web-based user interface of the SMP 300 Series (see Web-Based User Interface
starting on page 52).
NOTES:
• If no password is set, anyone can view the stream URL. If a password is set,
you must be logged in to view the URL.
• The factory configured passwords for all accounts on this device have been
set to the device serial number. In the event of a complete system reset, the
passwords convert to the default, which is no password (see Users and
Roles on page 86 to change a password).
2. The Recording Controls page opens (see figure 106).

Figure 106. Recording Controls Page

3. Note the Archive URL in the Stream URL panel.
4. Run QuickTime player. From the desktop, select Start > All Programs >
QuickTime > QuickTime Player.
The QuickTime media player opens.
5. From the File menu, select Open URL (see figure 107, 1).

Figure 107. QuickTime Player Menu — Open URL

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 157

 The Open URL dialog opens (see figure 108).
6. In the Enter an Internet URL to open field, enter the stream URL that was noted in
step 3 (1).

Enter an Internet URL to open:

rtsp://192.168.13.1/extron1
1
2
Figure 108. Enter Stream URL Information
7. Click OK (2). After a few seconds, the media stream from the SMP 300 Series plays on
the QuickTime player.
If QuickTime player fails to play the stream:
1. From the QuickTime player menu, select Edit > Preferences > QuickTime
Preferences.
2. Click the Advanced tab and select Safe mode (GDI only).
3. Click Apply, then OK to save the settings.
4. Close the player window and do this procedure again.
The QuickTime player image settings can now be changed if desired.
NOTE: The QuickTime player does not display closed caption information.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 158

Estimating Storage Requirements for a Recording

Estimating Storage per Recording Hour

It is necessary to know the video and audio bit rates configured in the Extron SMP 300
Series. For these examples, the calculations assume that the bit rates remain constant
during the recording. If using VBR (variable bit rate, which is the default) then the actual bit
rates are often slightly lower than this estimate. In some cases they can be higher.
To estimate storage per recording hour:
1. Find the SMP 300 Series video bit rate and audio bit rate, which are in kbps (kilobits per
second).
2. Insert those bit rates into the following equation:
[(video bit rate + audio bit rate) *3600 seconds per hour] / 8 bits per byte *1000 =
x MBph (megabytes per hour)
Example:
Using the default 720p High encoder preset, with
• Video bit rate = 5000 kbps
• Audio bit rate = 192 kbps
For a 1-hour recording (3600 seconds),
• ([5000 + 192] * 3600) / 8000 = 2336.4 MBph or 2.34 GBph
For the default encoder presets of an SMP 300 Series, the following are the estimated
storage requirements for each hour of recording:

Estimated Storage Requirements

Encoder Video bit rate Audio bit rate MB per hour GB per hour
Preset (kbps) (kbps)
1080p High 8000 320 3744.0 3.74
1080p Low 6000 128 2757.6 2.76
720p High 5000 192 2336.4 2.34
720p Low 3000 128 1470.6 1.41
480p High 2500 128 1182.6 1.18
480p Low 1500 80 711.0 0.71
VGA High 3500 128 1632.6 1.63
VGA Low 2500 128 1182.6 1.18
SMP 300 Series 10,000 320 4644.0 4.64
max. rates
SMP 300 Series 200 80 126.0 0.13
min. rates

NOTE: If several encoding rates are chosen, do the above calculation for each of the
possible rates. Also, estimate how often each of the encoding rates is selected.
To estimate the number of hours of recordings that can be stored on a specific size of hard
drive:
• Determine the SMP 300 Series video bitrate and audio bitrate, in kbps (kilobits per
second).
• Insert those bitrates into the following equation:
[(hard drive size in GB * 8,000,000) / (video bitrate +audio bitrate)]/3600 = x hours

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 159

 Front Panel Menu Diagrams
(For Composite mode only)

MENU PICTURE MENU RECORD/STREAM MENU INPUT MENU BACKGROUND MENU ADVANCED MENU VIEW COMM MENU
PRESETS STATUS
CONTROL CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION RECALL CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT Press and hold NEXT
INPUT 5 + NEXT
for 3 seconds.
ARCHIVE ENCODER CHANNEL SELECT ENCODER ENCODER INPUT SELECT RECALL IN<1> AUTO IMAGE “Hidden” Menu* ALARM STATUS
RECALL <N/A> -OR- <CONFIDENCE> [NONE, HDCP, VIDEO...]
<A> [ON] <ARCHIVE> <1> <back1080.png> OFF EDIT COMM
Rotate either to Rotate either to select a Rotate either to Rotate either to Rotate either to Rotate either to select. Rotate [ to select input. SETTINGS
select a preset to recall. channel. select encoder type. select encoder type. select input. Press NEXT to load Rotate { to toggle on or off.
the background file
and exit. ARCHIVE
NOTE: See the Record/Stream configuration
ARCHIVE ENCODER [A] H POSITION V INPUT #[3] PREVIEW HDMI OUT [...FILENAME...]
(For Composite mode only) diagram on the following page. SERIAL PORT
SAVE <N/A> +0000 +0000 <YUVp/HDTV> <1280X720@60Hz>
9600 RS232
Rotate either to select Rotate [ to adjust Horizontal Rotate either to Rotate either to select a Rotate either to
a preset # to save Position. select the input format. resolution. change baud rate.
current settings to. Rotate { to adjust Vertical Position. DRIVE SPACE INT
[FREE/TOTAL][GB]
(3) H START V AUTO MEMORY MAC ADRESS
IN<1> USER RECAL [A] H SIZE V (For Composite mode only) 005A6078CEC
<N/A> <640> <480> <128> <128> <ON>
This is set at the factory and
Rotate [ to select an Rotate [ to adjust Horizontal Size. Rotate [ to select the horizontal Rotate { to toggle
cannot be changed.
input. Rotate { to adjust Vertical Size. start pixel. Auto Memory
(Skipped in “Edit” mode.) DRIVE SPACE [USB]
Rotate { to select a preset. Rotate { to adjust the vertical On or Off. [FREE/TOTAL] [GB]
start pixel. DHCP MODE
TEST PATTERN <OFF> On
IN<1> USER SAVE [A] BRIGHT CONTRAST (3) H ACTIVE V
<064> <064> <N/A> Rotate either to toggle
<N/A> <1024> <0768>
Rotate either to select a DHCP mode On or Off. SELECTED VOLNAME
Rotate [ to select an Rotate [ to adjust Brightness. Rotate [ to adjust Horizontal Active pixel
Rotate { to adjust Contrast. width. test pattern. [FREE/TOTAL][GB]
input.
Rotate { to select a preset. Rotate { to adjust Vertical Active pixel height. IP ADDR
192.168.254.254
[A] COLOR TINT (3) TTLPIX PHASE RECORD DRIVE LIMITER Rotate [ to select octet field.
<064> <064> <XXX> <16> <NOT RESTRICTED> Rotate { to change address. [ARCH] BR 5000kpbs
Rotate either to select MULTI TS/RTP
Rotate [ to select Color. Rotate [ to adjust TTL pixel width.
Rotate { to select Tint. Rotate { to adjust phase. the drive restriction. SUBNET
255.255.000.000
Rotate either to change mask.
ASPECT RATIO IN[1] RESET CONF BR 350 kpbs
<NONE> UNI RTP/UDP
<FILL>
Rotate either to GATEWAY
Rotate either to
reboot or reset unit 000.000.000.000
select an aspect ratio for the
configurations.
selected input.
Rotate [ to select octet field.
Rotate { to change address.
EDID INPUT #[1]
<720p_60_2ch>
NOTE: The Input Configuration submenus are input
Rotate [ to set an
EDID value for the
specific. Depending on the input type, not all
active input. submenus (shown in gray on subsequent pages)
are available.
IN[1] AUDIO SELECT
<LPCH 2CH>
Rotate either to
select an audio input source
for the selected input.

IN[1] AUDIO LEVEL

<0 dB>
Rotate either to set the
audio input level from -18
to +24 dB.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 160

Front Panel Menu Diagrams (Record/Stream Configuration)
RECORD/STREAM Menu
CONFIGURATION
NEXT

ENCODER ENCODER
<ARCHIVE> <CONFIDENCE>
Rotate either to Rotate either to
select encoder select encoder
NEXT

ENCODER MODE ENCODER MODE

STREAMING
<DUAL> <COMPOSITE>
<ON>
Rotate either to
select mode. Rotate right for Dual mode. Rotate either to
NEXT toggle streaming
NEXT
on or off.
RECORDING RECORDING RECORDING RECORDING RECORDING NEXT
<OFF> <SINGLE> <OFF> <SINGLE> <Internal + 2nd>
STREAM METHOD STREAM METHOD
Rotate either to Rotate either to <PULL>
-OR- <PUSH>
select mode. select mode.
NEXT NEXT Rotate either to
NEXT
select push or pull.
RECORD TO 433.71 GB RECORD TO 71.75 GB
<INTERNAL> INTERNAL
NEXT NEXT
Rotate [ to select auto, internal, or Display only.
external Record To location.
STREAM PROTOCOL STREAM PROTOCOL STREAM PROTOCOL Rotate either to select protocol from
<UNI RTP/UDP> -OR- <MULTI RTP/UDP> <UNI TS/UDP> this list:
NEXT
UNI TS/UDP MULTI TS/UDP
NEXT Rotate either to select protocol. UNI TS/RTP MULTI TS/RTP
Press NEXT to select and move UNI ES/RTP MULTI ES/RTP
STREAMING 2ND REC TO X.XX GB
to next submenu.
<ON> USBFRONT <VOL NAME> Press NEXT to select and move
MULTICAST IP DESTINATION IP to next submenu.
Rotate either to Rotate either to select among XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
toggle streaming multiple volumes on a drive.
on or off. Rotate [ to select octet. Rotate [ to select octet.
NEXT Rotate { to change Rotate { to change

STREAM METHOD STREAM METHOD NEXT NEXT

<PULL>
-OR- <PUSH>
Rotate either to
select push or pull.

NEXT NEXT

STREAM PROTOCOL STREAM PROTOCOL STREAM PROTOCOL Rotate either to select protocol from
<UNI RTP/UDP> -OR- <MULTI RTP/UDP> <UNI TS/UDP> this list:
UNI TS/UDP MULTI TS/UDP
Rotate either to select protocol. UNI TS/RTP MULTI TS/RTP
Press NEXT to select and move UNI ES/RTP MULTI ES/RTP
to next submenu. Press NEXT to select and move to
next submenu.
MULTICAST IP DESTINATION IP
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
RESOLUTION
Rotate [ to select octet. Rotate [ to select octet. <512x288>
Rotate { to change Rotate { to change
Rotate either to
select streaming
NEXT NEXT resolution.

FRAME RATE
OUTPUT MODE <15>
<AUDIO/VIDEO>
Rotate either to
Rotate either to select streaming
select audio and video, frame rate.
or video only. If dual mono enabled:
VID BITRATE AUD
AUDIO OUTPUT -OR- AUDIO OUTPUT <350> <192>
<B ONLY> <B DUAL MONO>
Rotate [ to change video bitrate.
Rotate either to Rotate either to Rotate { to change audio bitrate.
select ChA, ChB or select B dual mono or A+B dual mono.
A+B. NEXT
RESOLUTION
<1280x720>
Rotate either to
select recording
resolution.

FRAME RATE
<30>
Rotate either to
select frame rate.

VID BITRATE AUD

<5000> <320>
Rotate [ to change video bitrate.
Rotate { to change audio bitrate.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 161

Glossary

Ad hoc recording — An ad hoc recording session is one that has been set up for a
specific occasion or task without being previously scheduled.
Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) — A standardized compression and encoding scheme for
lossy (low quality) digital audio. Higher bit rates provide higher quality. Part of the MPEG- 2
and MPEG-4 specifications. The SMP 300 Series supports AAC-LC (MPEG-2 part 7,
MPEG-4 part 3, sub-part 4 and part 14, MP4 audio).
Advanced Video Coding (AVC) — Video compression format, H.264/MPEG-4 part 10
(see the H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) definition on page 165).
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) — A protocol for assigning an IP address
(see page 166) to a device based on the device MAC (Media Access Control) (see
page 166) address or physical machine address, that maintains a table showing the
correlation between the two.
Archive stream or streams — The primary encoding streams are used to create
recordings, and they can also be used for streaming. Archive streams are typically higher
resolution than confidence streams.
Aspect ratio control — The aspect ratio of the video output can be controlled by selecting
a fill mode, which provides a full screen output, or a follow mode, which preserves the
original aspect ratio of the input signal.
Auto-Image — An Extron technology for scan converters and signal processors that
simplifies setup by executing image sizing, centering, and filtering adjustments with a single
button push.
Auto Memory — Auto memory recalls input and image settings for signals that have
previously been applied. If this feature is disabled, the device treats every newly applied
input as a new source.
B-frames — Bi-directionally predictive coded picture. Contains predictive, difference
information from the preceding and following I- or P-frame within a GOP (see page 165).
Data preceding or following the B-frame are required to recreate video information in a
B-frame. They offer significantly better compression than I or P frames, but are not available
in Baseline profile.
Bandwidth — The total range of frequencies required to pass a specific signal without
significant distortion or loss of data. In analog terms, the lower and upper frequency limits
are defined as the half power, or -3 dB signal strength drop, compared to the signal strength
of the middle frequency, or the maximum signal strength of any frequency, expressed as
xx Hz to xx kHz (or MHz) @ -3 dB. In digital terms, it is the maximum bit rate at a specified
error rate, expressed in bits per second (bps). The device bandwidth should be wider than
the highest possible bandwidth of the signals it may handle. (In general, the wider the
bandwidth, the better the performance. However, bandwidth that is too wide can pass
excessive noise with the signal.)
Baud — The speed of data transmission, often in bits per second or megabits per second.
Bit rate — The number of bits that are conveyed or processed per unit of time. Bit rate is
quantified using the bits per second (bit / s) unit, often in conjunction with an SI prefix such
as kilo- (kbit / s or kbps), mega- (Mbit / s or Mbps), or giga- (Gbit / s or Gbps).

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 162

Channel — A group of inputs that the encoder treats as a single input because only one
input in the group can be selected and active at a time. One video input and one audio input
signal are selected per channel and passed on to the encoder. For the SMP 352 there are
two input channels:
• Channel A groups inputs 1 (HDMI) and 2 (HDMI) together.
• Channel B groups inputs 3 (component or composite video), 4 (HDMI), and
5 (3G/HD/SDI) together.
In composite mode, depending on layout configuration, one or both channels can be
encoded (together with a background image and metadata) and incorporated into the
output stream.
Codec — (1) Coder/decoder: A device that converts analog video and audio signals into a
digital format for transmission over telecommunications facilities and also converts received
digital signals back into analog format. It may also dial up the connection, like a modem for
teleconferencing. (2) Compressor/decompressor: Codecs can be implemented in software,
hardware, or a combination of both.
Composite encoding mode — The SMP 300 Series mode that signals from channels A
and B are combined into one archive stream (forming a single recording). This is the only
mode available in the SMP 351 and SMP 351 3G-SDI.
Composite encoding is the alternative to dual channel encoding mode signals from channel
A and signals from channel B are encoded to separate archive streams (and, therefore,
separate recordings), each with its own settings. SMP 352 Series models and SMP 351
Series models with LinkLicense offer both dual channel encoding and composite encoding.
Compression — The art and science of reducing the amount of data required to represent
a picture or a stream of pictures and sound before sending or storing it. Compression
systems are designed to eliminate redundant or repeated information to the desired data
level while allowing the original information to be reproduced to the desired quality.
Confidence stream — The encoding stream used for video previews, as in the AV
Controls panel, and also for streaming. For composite encoding mode, signals for the
confidence stream are encoded at or below the resolution or refresh rate of the archive
encoding stream. The confidence stream uses the same audio settings as the archive
stream, but the video encoding differs.
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) — Constant bit rate encoding means that the rate at which
codec output data is consumed is constant. CBR is useful for streaming multimedia content
on data communication channels which operate more efficiently or require the bit rate to
remain within a tight tolerance. Typically the constant bit rate is created by stuffing bits into a
variable bit rate signal which has a defined peak or maximum limit.
Constrained Variable Bit Rate (CVBR) — This scheme is similar to Variable Bit Rate
(VBR), (see page 169) but sets a maximum allowed bit rate that the encoder cannot
exceed.
Darwin Streaming Server (DSS) — Darwin Streaming Server is software developed by
Apple that provides a high performance media streaming server for delivering content.
The software is used to simultaneously stream to a broad range of screens and devices
(including computers, televisions, smartphones, and tablets).
Data bits — The number of bits used to represent one character of data. Data bits can be
7, 8, or 16, but most serial devices use 8 bits for ASCII characters.
DB ID — DB ID is the database identification number of a scheduled recording event. The
number appears in the event details within the Scheduled Events page.
To determine the event ID for a recording event, click on the Scheduled Events tab, locate
and click on the event in the calendar. The ID number appears in the Event Details dialog
box. Troubleshooting logs can be sorted or filtered by the event ID number.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 163

DDC — Display Data Channel (DDC) is a bidirectional communications standard
developed by VESA (Video Electronics Standards Association) that defines a universal data
transmission standard for the connectivity between display devices and computers.
Decoder — 1) In analog video, a device used to separate the RGBS (red, green, blue and
sync) signals from a composite video signal. Also known as an NTSC decoder. 2) In digital
systems, a device which does the reverse of an encoder, undoing the encoding so that
the original information can be retrieved. The same method used to encode is usually just
reversed in order to decode. Video over IP decoders accept IP data streams and output
an analog or digital video signal. 3) In control systems, the device in a synchronizer or
programmer which reads the encoded signal and turns it into a form of control.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) — A network protocol that enables
a server to automatically assign unique network addresses (IP address, subnet mask,
gateway) to a device using a defined range of numbers configured for the network.
DiffServe (Differentiated Services) — DiffServ specifies a scalable, coarse-grained
mechanism for classifying and managing network traffic and providing quality of service
(QoS).
Domain Name System (DNS) — A database system that translates domain names
(such as www.extron.com) into IP addresses.
Dual channel encoding mode — The SMP 300 Series mode that signals from channel A
and signals from channel B are encoded to separate archive streams (and, therefore,
separate recordings), each with its own settings. SMP 352 Series models and SMP 351
Series models with LinkLicense offer both dual channel encoding and composite encoding.
Dual channel encoding, the alternative to composite encoding mode, signals from channels
A and B are combined into one archive stream (forming a single recording). All models offer
composite encoding mode.
Dynamic IP address — An IP address that is automatically assigned to a client device in
a TCP/IP network, typically by a DHCP server. Network devices that serve multiple users,
such as servers and printers, are usually assigned a static (unchanging) IP address.
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) — A data structure used to communicate
video display information, including native resolution and vertical interval refresh rate
requirements, to a source device over the Display Device Channel (DDC). The source device
outputs the optimal video format for the display based on the provided EDID, ensuring
proper video image quality.
EDID Minder — Automatically manages EDID communication between connected devices.
Elementary Stream — Raw H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) (see page 165) video or raw AAC
audio (see page 162), not wrapped by additional headers.
Encoder — A hardware device or software program used to compress (encode) or change
a signal from one format to another or convert an analog signal into a digital data stream.
The SMP 300 Series is an encoder that converts analog audio and video into digital
streams.
Ethernet — A Local Area Network (LAN) standard officially known as IEEE 802.3. Ethernet
and LAN technology are used for interconnecting computers, printers, workstations,
terminals, services, and similar devices, within the same building or campus. Ethernet
operates over twisted pair and over coaxial cable at speeds starting at 10 Mbps. For LAN
interconnectivity, Ethernet is a physical link and data link protocol reflecting the two lowest
layers of the OSI Reference Model.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) — A protocol that is used to transfer files from one host
to another host over a TCP-based network (such as the Internet). Also see Secure File
Transport Protocol (SFTP) on page 167 for more information.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 164

Gateway — A router or proxy server between networks, or a network node equipped to
interface with another network that uses different protocols (an entrance and exit into a
communications network).
Group of Pictures (GOP) — A group of successive pictures within a coded video stream.
A GOP begins with an Intraframe (I-frame) (see page 166) containing the full spatial
resolution and data of a video frame. Predictive frames (P-frames) (see page 167) follow
I-frames and contain data that has changed from the preceding I-frame. Bi-predictive
frames (B-frames) (see page 162) reference frames before and after the current frame.
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) — H.264/MPEG-4 Part 10. A block oriented, motion-compression-
based codec standard developed by the ITU-T Video Coding Experts Group (VCEG)
together with the ISO / IEC Moving Picture Experts Group (MPEG).
HDCP — High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. HDCP is a digital rights management
scheme developed by Intel® to prevent the copying of digital video and audio content.
HDCP is mandatory for the HDMI interface, optional for DVI. HDCP defines three basic
system components: source, sink, and repeater.
HDMI — High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI®): an interface for the digital
transmission of high definition video, multi-channel audio, and control signals, over a single
cable. (NOTE: The SMP transmits 2-channel digital audio only.)
HDTV — High definition television with a resolution of 1080p (1920x1080p),
720p (1280x720p), or 1080i (1920x1080i).
HDTV 1080p/60 — High definition television displayed at 1920x1080 resolution
(1080p; 2,073,600 pixels) with a refresh rate of 60 Hz.
Hop — In a packet-switching network, a hop is the trip a data packet takes from one router
(or intermediate point) to another in the network.
Host name — This is a unique name by which a device is known on a network. It identifies
a particular host in electronic communication.
Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) — A network protocol based on TCP/IP that is used
to retrieve hypertext objects from remote web pages and allows servers to transfer and
display web content to users.
Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Sockets Layer (HTTPS) — A networking
protocol that allows web servers to transfer and display web content to users securely.
All transferred data is encrypted so that only the recipient is able to access and read the
content. It is not a protocol itself, but rather a combination of Hypertext Transfer Protocol
(HTTP) on top of the SSL/TLS protocol, which adds the security capabilities of SSL/TLS to
standard HTTP communications.
iCalendar file — An iCalendar file is a file containing schedule, task, or meeting information
in a standard format. iCalendar files work independent of transport protocol and can be
used cross-platform to share calendar data.
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) — A TCP/IP communications protocol
used by hosts and adjacent routers on a network to establish multicast group memberships.
When the SMP 300 Series is connected to a streaming media server, the IGMP multicast
protocol is used to pull RTSP streams. The IGMP multicast protocol conserves network
bandwidth because the streaming media server only connects to the SMP 300 Series when
the connection to the streaming media server is made by the user. All network switches and
routing equipment must be properly configured to support IGMP snooping and IGMP query
to avoid flooding all endpoints with unnecessary streaming traffic.
Internet Protocol (IP) — The primary protocol that establishes the Internet. It defines
addressing methods and structures for datagram encapsulation, allowing delivery of packets
from a source to a destination across an internetwork based purely on addressing.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 165

Intraframe (I-frame) — In video compression schemes, intraframes (I-frames) are primary
frames that contain the full spatial resolution and data of a video frame.
IP address — A numerical label using the Internet Protocol assigned to devices in a
network. The IP address for the source and destination are included in an IP datagram. A
unique, 32-bit binary number (12-digit dotted decimal notation — xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) based
on version 4 of the Internet Protocol (IPv4) that identifies each sender and each receiver
of information connected to a LAN, WAN, or the Internet. IP addresses can be static (see
Static IP Address on page 168) or dynamic (see DHCP on page 164).
Java™ — A class-based, object oriented programming language developed at Sun
Microsystems®, Inc. (merged with Oracle® Corporation). Programs written in Java can run
on multiple platforms.
JavaScript® — A scripting programming language adding interactive features to web
pages.
LAN — Local Area Network. A computer network that connects devices in a limited area,
such as a building or campus, using network equipment that does not include leased
communications lines.
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) — The maximum packet size allowed in a network
data packet.
Media Access Control (MAC) — A unique hardware number given to devices that
connect to the Internet. When your computer or networking device (such as a router, hub,
or interface) is connected to the Internet, a table (see ARP on page 162) relates the IP
address of the device to its corresponding physical address on the LAN (see page 166).
This protocol allows for several terminals or network nodes to communicate within a multi-
point network, typically a local area network.
Metadata — A metadata record consists of attributes to describe another object. The
Dublin Core Metadata Element Set contains 15 generic elements for describing resources:
Contributor, Publisher, Title, Data, Language, Format, Subject, Description, Identifier,
Relation, Source, Type, Coverage, and Rights.
MPEG-2 — The video compression algorithm used for DVD-Video, Digital Broadcast
Satellite (DBS), and Digital TV (including HDTV) delivery systems.
MPEG-4 — A patented collection of methods defining compression of audio and visual (AV)
digital data. MPEG-4 allows higher amounts of data compression and encoding efficiency
than MPEG-2. It also includes support for digital rights management and for interactive
multimedia applications.
MPEG-4 uses include compression of AV data for streaming media on the web; CD,
HD DVD, or Blu-Ray Disc distribution; voice (telephone, videophone) distribution; and
broadcast television applications.
Multicast — A network technology for the delivery of information to a group of destinations
simultaneously. A single stream is sent from the source to a group of devices at the same
time in one transmission. Delivery is managed by network switches using the most efficient
strategy to deliver the messages over each link of the network only once, and creating
copies only when the links to the group of destinations split.
Network Address Translation (NAT) — A network protocol that allows multiple devices to
have their own, individual, private addresses, but they share one public IP address (IPv4) for
connection to the internet or other networks.
Network Time Protocol (NTP) — A protocol used for synchronizing the clocks of
computer systems over networks.
Opencast Server — An Opencast server is an open-source platform to support the
management of audio and video content in the education market. Institutions can use an
Opencast server to produce, manage, and distribute lecture recordings.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 166

Overscan — An applied “zoom” on SMPTE inputs (NTSC, PAL, 480p, 576p,
720p,1080i,1080p) to hide closed caption/ancillary data, edge effects, or other video
artifacts.
Parity (or Parity checking) — An error detection technique that tests the integrity of the
digital data being sent. Parity can be set to None, Even, or Odd.
Predictive frame (P-frame) — In video compression schemes, predictive frames follow
I-frames and contain data that has changed from the preceding I-frame (see page 166).
Presenter — A person who makes recordings using the SMP, regardless of their login role
(user or administrator).
When the Record button is pressed in the AV Controls panel, the Start an Adhoc
Recording pop-up window opens, where you can enter the name of the presenter in the
Presenter field. The name of the presenter is stored with the metadata for the recording,
and it appears in the Creator column of the Scheduled Events > Recording
Calendar > List View table. If recordings are uploaded from the SMP to an
Opencast, or Kaltura system, and if that presenter is a user of that publishing system, the
presenter or creator name is used to sort or tag that recording.
Pull streaming — Streaming method that allows users to search for content. Users specify
a content source and initiate a download or view the stream. The content streaming is
initiated by the end user (at the decoder rather than at the encoder).
Push streaming — A streaming method where the encoder sends content out to one
(unicast) or more (multicast) decoders using one of the transport protocols. Content
streaming is initiated at the encoder.
Quality of Service (QoS) — The grade of performance, such as transmission rates and
error rates, of a communications channel or system. QoS provides a level of predictability
and control beyond the best-effort delivery that the router provides by default (best-
effort service provides packet transmission with no assurance of reliability, delay, jitter, or
throughput).
Real-time Messaging Protocol (RTMP) — An application level protocol, owned by
Adobe, designed for transmission of audio, video, and data over TCP.
Real-time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) — A network control protocol designed for use in
audio visual and communications systems to control streaming media.
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) — An Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)
standard for streaming real-time multimedia over IP in packets.
Router — A network device that forwards packets from one network to another.
Secondary storage mode — The SMP setting in which recordings are saved to two
storage drives rather than one. This is the alternative to single storage mode (see Single
Storage Mode on page 162).
Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) — Similar to FTP, this protocol adds encryption and
requires credentials for file transfers.
Secure Shell (SSH) — A network protocol that creates a secure channel used for secure
communication between two computers on a network. SSH is typically used for data
communication, remote shell (login) services, or command execution.
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) — A protocol used by web servers and web browsers that
creates a uniquely encrypted channel for private communications over the public Internet.
Session Announcement Protocol (SAP) — Used by source devices (encoders or servers)
in conjunction with SDP to publicize the availability of a stream to decoders and players.
The SAP periodically broadcasts session description information on an industry standard
multicast address and port. When received by remote clients, these announcements can be
used to facilitate the viewing of streams, eliminating the need for user configuration.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 167

Session Description Protocol (SDP) — This protocol is used to describe streaming
media initialization parameters. It covers session announcement, session invitation, media
type and format, and other forms of multimedia session initiation (as defined in RFC 2327).
SDP does not deliver media itself. It simply details the stream parameters and how the
stream is started.
Simple Instruction Set (SIS) — A set of commands developed by Extron that allows for
RS-232, USB, and TCP / IP control of certain Extron products. A command is sent from
the control device to the product (using a minimal number of characters) and a response is
received from the product and shown on the display of the control device.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) — An application-layer protocol that
facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. This protocol
collects (and configures) information from network devices (such as servers, hubs, switches,
and routers) on an Internet Protocol (IP) network.
Single Storage Mode — The SMP setting in which recordings are saved to only one
storage drive. This is the alternative to secondary storage mode (see Secondary Storage
Mode on page 161).
Static IP address — An IP address specifically assigned to a device or system in a
network configuration. This type of address requires manual configuration of the network
device or system and can only be changed manually or by enabling DHCP (see page 164).
Stop bits — The bit or bits transmitted that signal the end of a character. Typically set to 1.
Streaming media (stream) — Multimedia that is constantly received by (and normally
presented to) an end-user while being delivered by a streaming provider. Internet television is
a commonly streamed medium.
Switch — A network switch enables communication between devices in a network by
routing data between ports at the data link layer (layer 2 of the OSI model). A managed
switch can be configured to transmit data only to the specific device for which the data was
meant.
Telnet port — Most controllers support Telnet and use port 23 as the communication port
to receive or issue commands.
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) — A protocol developed for the Internet that
provides reliable end-to-end data packet delivery from one network device to another.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) — The communication
protocol of the Internet. Computers and devices with direct access to the Internet are
provided with a copy of the TCP/IP program to allow them to send and receive information
in an understandable form.
Time To Live (TTL) — A value that specifies the number of router hops multicast traffic can
make between routed domains when it exits a source.
TMDS — Transition Minimized Differential Signaling. An all-digital video transmission
standard developed by Silicon Image, Inc. TMDS is the core technology used in DVI and
HDMI.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 168

Transport Streams (TS) — A form of media wrapped in MPEG‑2 transport stream
headers. The MPEG‑2 transport headers contain information about the media.
The SMP is compatible with transport streams that contain H.264 encoded video and
AAC encoded audio. Transport streams containing MPEG-2 video and AC3 audio are not
supported.
• TS/UDP — (Unicast or multicast) An MPEG‑2 transport stream containing the
elementary streams for the audio and video. It is sent using UDP packets.
• TS/RTP — (Unicast or multicast) Transport stream that is sent using RTP/UDP. RTP
provides sequencing information; if the sequencing information is reordered by the
network, RTP reorganizes and processes the information in the correct order. UDP
would process the sequencing information out of order, making RTP performance better
on larger, many hop networks.
Unicast — Sending messages from one device to a single network destination on a
network. Having N clients of a unicast stream requires the server to produce N streams of
unicast data.
User Datagram Protocol (UDP) — A connectionless, transport layer protocol that sends
packets (datagrams) across networks using “best-effort” delivery. It is a relatively simple
protocol that does not include handshaking.
Variable Bit Rate (VBR) — A compression scheme that adjusts the output bit rate around
a specified target bit rate depending on the audio or image complexity. More bandwidth is
used when the video frame is more complex and less bandwidth is used when the video
frame is simple.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 169

 Extron Warranty

Extron warrants this product against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years from the date
of purchase. In the event of malfunction during the warranty period attributable directly to faulty workmanship and/
or materials, Extron will, at its option, repair or replace said products or components, to whatever extent it shall
deem necessary to restore said product to proper operating condition, provided that it is returned within the warranty
period, with proof of purchase and description of malfunction to:
USA, Canada, South America, Asia: Japan:
and Central America: Extron Asia Pte Ltd Extron, Japan
Extron 135 Joo Seng Road, #04-01 Kyodo Building, 16 Ichibancho
1230 South Lewis Street PM Industrial Bldg. Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0082
Anaheim, CA 92805 Singapore 368363 Japan
U.S.A. Singapore

Europe: China: Middle East:

Extron Europe Extron China Extron Middle East
Hanzeboulevard 10 686 Ronghua Road Dubai Airport Free Zone
3825 PH Amersfoort Songjiang District F13, PO Box 293666
The Netherlands Shanghai 201611 United Arab Emirates, Dubai
China
Africa:
Extron South Africa
3rd Floor, South Tower
160 Jan Smuts Avenue
Rosebank 2196, South Africa

This Limited Warranty does not apply if the fault has been caused by misuse, improper handling care, electrical
or mechanical abuse, abnormal operating conditions, or if modifications were made to the product that were not
authorized by Extron.

NOTE: If a product is defective, please call Extron and ask for an Application Engineer to receive an RA (Return
Authorization) number. This will begin the repair process.

USA: 714.491.1500 or 800.633.9876 Asia: 65.6383.4400

Europe: 31.33.453.4040 or 800.3987.6673 Japan: 81.3.3511.7655
Africa: 27.11.447.6162 Middle East: 971.4.299.1800

Units must be returned insured, with shipping charges prepaid. If not insured, you assume the risk of loss or damage
during shipment. Returned units must include the serial number and a description of the problem, as well as the
name of the person to contact in case there are any questions.
Extron makes no further warranties either expressed or implied with respect to the product and its quality,
performance, merchantability, or fitness for any particular use. In no event will Extron be liable for direct, indirect, or
consequential damages resulting from any defect in this product even if Extron has been advised of such damage.
Please note that laws vary from state to state and country to country, and that some provisions of this warranty may
not apply to you.

Contact Information

Worldwide Headquarters: Extron USA West, 1025 E. Ball Road, Anaheim, CA 92805, 800.633.9876